JP2021104375A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest in a game of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: shooting means capable of shooting game balls by varying shooting intensity of the game balls on the basis of an operation of a player; a first channel in which the game balls shot by the shooting means at a first shooting intensity can flow down; a second channel in which game balls shot at a second shooting intensity different from the first shooting intensity flow down, and in which variable ball entry means is arranged; and suggestion means for displaying a suggestion mode for suggesting the fact that the game balls are shot to the second channel on display means, after identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed. Therefore, an interest in a game of a player can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-325886

However, there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine in terms of improving the interest of the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition means for acquiring information based on a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. And the storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means. A display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result, and a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means at the first firing intensity. The first flow path through which the ball can flow down and the game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity flow down, and the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged. And a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path after the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. ..

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is rotated based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. The suggestion mode includes a direction suggestion mode that has at least a part of a ring shape and indicates the direction of the second flow path.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating in the direction in which the gaming ball flies into the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. Based on the storage means for storing the information acquired in the above, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Those having a display means for displaying identification information and a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player and a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity by the launching means can flow down. A possible first flow path, a second flow path in which a gaming ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity flows down and the variable entry means is arranged, and a specific said After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, and the suggested mode is a ring. It has at least a part of the shape and includes a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

As a result, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggestion mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the direction suggestion mode rotates in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path. It is displayed as a target.

This has the effect of notifying the player of the direction in which the game ball is to be launched in an easy-to-understand manner.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member in line XXb-XXb of FIG. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a close position. It is a front view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a close position. It is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is a front view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a reference view, and (b) is a front schematic view schematically showing a slide mechanism. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. Is a schematic front view schematically showing. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a reference figure. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal surface is directed to the front side, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the decorative surface is directed to the front side. It is a schematic front view illustrated. (A) and (b) are frontal schematic views of a slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position. (A) and (b) are frontal schematic views of a slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position. (A) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram showing the control of the display area in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the effect in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the reversing operation of the slide member in the first control example. (A) and (b) are views which show the decorative surface of the slide member in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display control in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the over-winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning over-winning table, and (c) is a predictive over-winning table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the winning table schematically, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the out-of-order over winning table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit ending table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the predictive ending table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content schematically, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the detached ending table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotary drive. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of a scenario schematically, and (d) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of a reversal drive scenario schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the drive data storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp editing process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal drive process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing for display which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a normal winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing correction process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the first variable winning device in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in the second control example. (A) and (b) are views which show the decorative surface of the slide member in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display device of the pachinko machine in the third control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect drive scenario in the third control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display device in the third control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game timekeeping processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win a prize in the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), the ball is put into a special gaming state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. Can be done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operating unit 200. In addition, in FIGS. 5 to 14, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

Here, in FIGS. 7 to 10, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position is shown, and in FIGS. 11 to 14, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position is shown. NS.

In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position with the display surface 523a facing the front, and in FIGS. 8 and 12, the display surface 523a is facing the front. The states in which the liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged at the separated positions are shown in the drawings. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position with the decorative surface 523b facing the front, and in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decorative surface 523b is facing the front. The states in which the liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged at the separated positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably housed in the internal space of the back case 300.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. ..

The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 arranged on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed so as to be slidably displaceable in a direction close to or separated from each other. The pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have a speed and displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement) of their displacement (rotation around the rotation shaft 523c and slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). ) Are set (controlled) to be the same as each other.

The base member 400 is rotatably formed between the first rotation position and the second rotation position which is substantially 90 ° out of phase with the first rotation position. At the first rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and at the second rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying a design or the like, and is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the display surface 523a is oriented toward the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11 and 12). ) And a posture in which the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a, faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13 and 14).

When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidly displaced in the directions close to each other and arranged at close positions, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol While the display device 81 is invisiblely shielded (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11 and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid-displaced in a direction in which they are separated from each other and arranged at the separated positions, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (FIGS. 8, FIG. 10, FIG. 12 and FIGS. 14).

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23, a configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the back case 300 will be described.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400.

It should be noted that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, FIG. 19 shows the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position, and FIG. 18 shows the base member 400 in the second rotation position. The transition state when rotating from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotational drive mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and the like. A second wheel member 322 and an lining member 331-334 for holding each of the wheel members 321 and 322 are arranged.

In the rotary drive mechanism, the drive motor 311 and the pinion gear 312 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 311 and the first gear (first transmission gear 313a) are meshed with the pinion gear 312 and the last gear (first gear). The 3 transmission gears 313c) are provided with a transmission gear train meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and are arranged on the upper right side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in front view. A second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c, respectively.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members rotatably supported by a shaft 303 erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and are outer peripheral edges of the base member 400. A plurality of wheels are arranged at predetermined intervals along the above. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located at two locations below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located at two locations above the base member 400 and at two locations on the left and right sides. Each is arranged. Here, the detailed configuration of each wheel member 321 and 322 will be described with reference to FIG.

20 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 in the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 in the line XXb-XXb of FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture of projecting toward the front side, and the shaft is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301. Around the 303, a first concave portion 301b1 and a second concave portion 301b2, which are concentric with the shaft 303 and are circular in front view, are recessed in the bottom wall portion 301.

The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is , The dimension is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error in assembling the first wheel member 321 into the second recess 301b2.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which grooves 321a and 322a having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and are based on the grooves 321a and 322a. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. As a result, the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the back base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward in FIG. 20A) and in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 20A). can.

The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. As a result, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that supports the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

Further, the outer diameter of the wall portion of the second wheel member 322 located on the front side (left side of FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. Will be done. That is, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger on the wall portion on the front side than on the wall portion on the back side. As a result, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 and improve the durability while suppressing an error in the assembling direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500, which is relatively heavy, is arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 that receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is tilted forward to the front side. Since the second wheel member 322 is arranged above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the wall portion on the front side of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration is particularly effective for suppressing the forward leaning posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

It will be described back from FIG. 15 to FIG. The lining members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening in the center into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. .. As a result, the lining members 331 to 334 are laid on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming out of the shaft 303.

The base member 400 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 401 having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view is formed in the center, and is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge, and the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 and the second described above are formed. The flange portion 402 inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the last gear (third transmission) in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism, which is engraved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. It includes a gear portion 403 to which the gear 313c) is meshed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the positive direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. , The rotation of the gear at the end of the transmission gear train (third transmission gear 313c) is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in the front view (in the right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the positive direction, the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the gear (third transmission gear 313c) at the end of the transmission gear train is rotated. , The base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (rotation direction to the left in FIG. 19) by being transmitted to the gear portion 403, and is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. NS.

In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 mainly in contact with the groove bottom in the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a are supported by rolling contact between the circumferential surfaces, the contact surface is minimized and the groove is supported with less friction. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 required for rotationally driving the base member 400 can be suppressed.

Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is arranged (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has a first rotation position and a second rotation position with respect to the back case 300. When rotated between, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated along with this rotation, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG. 19.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are front perspective views and front views of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 show a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL. It is a front perspective view and the front view of the slide unit SL in the state of being in the state. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail arranged on the front side of the cover member 420. It mainly includes 510, a slide member 520 arranged on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to cause slide displacement.

The cover member 420 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 421 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view is formed in the center. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Is arranged (fixed).

The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is arranged at a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 in the front view when arranged at a close position, and can rotate without interfering with the cover member 420.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32 and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33 and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

In addition, in FIGS. 30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position, which is the position for arranging the slide member 520 in the close position, is separated from the slide member 520 in FIGS. 34 and 35. In the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the outward reversal position, which is the position for arranging the position, in FIGS. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 rotates from the inward protrusion position to the outward reversal position or vice versa. The transition states at the time of being performed are illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 30 to 35, in order to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and facilitate understanding, the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

The slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for sliding-driving each of the slide members 520. Since they are configured to be the same, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one of them will be described, and the other will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. The transmission gear 433 to be meshed and the rack gear 434a to which the transmission gear 433 is meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral side and the rack member 434 is formed in a curved plate shape, and the inner peripheral side of the rack member 434. The base end side is fixed to the transmission gear 435 meshed with the rack gear 434b engraved in the above, the pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and the pair of arm drive gears 436. A pair of transmission arms 437 and a pair of transmission arms 437 are mainly provided.

Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 (the position at which the tip end side thereof faces the opening 421 side of the cover member 420). When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated to perform the pair of transmissions. The arm 437 is rotated around its base end side in opposite directions.

When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the positive direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 go through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and then move to the outward reversal position (approximately 180 from the inward reversal position) shown in FIGS. 34 and 35. It is rotated by ° and is arranged at a position where the tip end side thereof faces the side opposite to the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

On the other hand, from the state where the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the opposite direction, and the rotation is transmitted via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. When transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the above, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated to perform the pair of transmissions. The arm 437 is rotated around its base end side in opposite directions. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the opposite direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inward reversal positions shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

As will be described later, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably connected to the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated around the base end side. The inner surface of the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the tip end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slidably displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

In this case, in the configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted into the slide displacement of the slide member 520 by using the linear rack member extending along the slide direction of the slide member 520, the slide member 520 When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the back case 300 (outer wall portion 302). Therefore, the base member 400 is moved to the back case 300. On the other hand, it cannot be rotated.

When the linear rack member is housed in the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to allow the base member 400 to rotate with respect to the back case 300, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 becomes short. Not only that, the linear rack member is visibly exposed from the opening 421 to the player, and the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable, but in this case, since the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps with the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide The amount of slide displacement of the member 520 is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is arranged along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side (outside of the opening 421) of the cover member 420, and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is rotated by the rack member 434. The displacement of the slide member 520 is converted to the rotation of the arm drive gear 436 to rotate the transmission arm 437. Therefore, the base member 400 is attached to the rear case 300 while ensuring the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520. The rack member 434 can be prevented from being exposed from the opening 421, and the appearance can be improved. Further, since the drive motor 431 can be arranged on the outside (both sides) of the slide displacement locus of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point as well.

It will be described back from FIG. 24 to FIG. 29. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and when the slide rail 510 is expanded and contracted, the slide member 520 is moved with respect to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair of supporting both ends of the slide member 520 as a set, and the two sets are in a posture in which the expansion / contraction directions are different from each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). They are placed facing each other.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. Note that in FIGS. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is shown for ease of understanding.

In the present embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 are arranged. In these two sets, the distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set and the pair of slides in the other set are set. Since the rails are configured to be substantially the same except that they are smaller than the opposite distance between the rails 510, both are designated by the same reference numerals, only one of them will be described, and the other will be omitted. By providing a difference in the above-mentioned facing intervals, one set of slide rails 510 can be arranged between the opposite sets of slide rails 510.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to the base end rail 511 arranged on the front surface of the cover member 420 so as to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base end rail 511. The intermediate rail 512 is provided, and the tip rail 513 is connected so as to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the intermediate rail 512. That is, the base end rail 511 and the tip end rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

The slide member 520 includes one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the tip rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are arranged on the back side, respectively, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 521. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524. The facing member 525 is provided so as to face each other.

The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is arranged and a liquid crystal-side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523, and these rail-side members. The 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable.

Specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are bored in two places of the rail side member 521a, and a pair of columnar insertion pins 521b1 inserted into the two insertion holes 521a1 are formed from the liquid crystal side member 521b. It is thrust. The inter-axis distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the inter-axis distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

In this case, the axial directions of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 are orthogonal to the slide direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 over the entire circumference, and the gap can cause the two to be displaced relative to each other in either direction (direction perpendicular to both axes). can.

A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1 to prevent the insertion pin 521b1 from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion into which the insertion hole 521a1 of the rail side member 521a is bored is set to be smaller than the protrusion dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. As a result, the rail-side member 521a can be displaced relative to the liquid crystal-side member 521b with respect to the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can form an inclined posture with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other side guided member 522 side as a fulcrum. For example, with respect to the rail-side member 521a, the liquid crystal-side member 521b precedes in the direction of slide displacement, and the distance between them increases on the front side in the direction of slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of slide displacement). Relative displacement in the form is acceptable. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523.

The liquid crystal display device 523 is a rectangular plate-like body viewed from the front, and as described above, is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side thereof is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern or the like, and the side opposite to the one side. The other side is the decorated decorative surface 523b.

In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with columnar rotating shafts 523c from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each rotating shaft 523c is a one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and another side guided member. It is rotatably supported in the shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c of 522, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 via the rotating shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b2, 522c, and the rotation causes the display surface 523a. It is possible to form a posture in which the face is directed to the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

The axis of the rotating shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, since the liquid crystal display is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the display surface 523a side is heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetrical shape of the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated when the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotation drive mechanism arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521. The rotary drive mechanism is meshed with the drive motor 531 and the pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, the first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. ..

The rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 so that their displacement (rotation) speeds and displacement (rotation) timings (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same as each other. Will be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, regardless of whether the liquid crystal display device 523 faces the front of the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant.

A sliding groove 524a extending linearly along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 is bored in the connecting frame 524, and the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. It is inserted as possible. Since the connecting frame 524 is arranged on the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide drive mechanism described above, and the tip side thereof is a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid and displaced.

By connecting the connecting frame 524 between the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, the entire liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other side member 522 are connected. The rigidity of the liquid crystal can be increased. As a result, it is easy to maintain a constant facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522, and it is possible to facilitate smooth rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force during the rotational drive of the liquid crystal display device 523.

The facing member 525 is a plate-shaped member erected from the front of the connecting frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) and a predetermined interval (the surface of the liquid crystal display device 523) of the liquid crystal display device 523. They are arranged facing each other with an interval (interval that allows rotation). Further, a plurality of LEDs (effect means) are arranged on the facing member 525, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523 and facing each other.

A structure in which the slide member 520 configured in this way is slidly displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39 (a), 40 (a) and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b) and 41 (b) are the slide member 520. It is a rear view of.

In FIG. 39, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, in FIG. 41, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position, and in FIG. 40, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged from a close position. The transition state when the slide is displaced to the separated position or vice versa is shown in the figure. Further, FIG. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, respectively.

Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same displacement speed (slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement). Is set (controlled). Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged in the inward protruding position (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the close position. Is placed in. From this state, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions with respect to the base end side thereof, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connecting frame 524, whereby the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 523 is slidably displaced in the direction of extending the slide rail 510.

When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the outwardly inverted position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). , The slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position.

On the other hand, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in the direction opposite to the above-described case from the state shown in FIG. 41, the tip end side of the transmission arms 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connecting frame 524. , The liquid crystal display device 523 is slidably displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 were further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 were placed in the inwardly projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 was shortened. The state is set, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position.

FIG. 42 (a) is a reference view, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

In the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). Since the other configurations of the reference structure are the same as those of the present embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed so as to be slidable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522. It is formed from a liquid crystal display device 523 that is pivotally supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as the slide displacement, and the variation of the effect operation can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decorative surface 523b can be visually recognized by the player.

However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation is started or stopped. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (one side guided member X, the other side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force is applied expands and contracts the slide rail 510. , The slide is displaced. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 only while keeping it stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. Allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) arranged on the side guided member 521, and the side arranged on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The permissible amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 of 42 (b) left side) can be made different.

As a result, when an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is displaced to the other side. It is easier to displace than the 522 side, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (FIG. 42 (b) vertical direction) (FIG. 42 (b) left direction). .. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510 (that is, restricting the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). It is possible to prevent the 520 from being slidably displaced. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) arranged on the one-side guided member 521 is arranged on the other-side guided member 522. One-sided guided member 521 in a form in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side to be installed (left side in FIG. 42B). Rotational drive means (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534) are arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the above (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotary drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism is arranged so that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is directed toward the direction away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced by a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

FIG. 43A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position, and FIG. 43B is a front schematic view schematically showing the liquid crystal display device 523 at a close position. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism 500 in the arranged state.

Here, in the above-mentioned reference structure (see FIG. 42 (a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidably displaced in a direction close to each other and arranged in a close position, they come into contact with each other in a close position without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431 and each gear 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for sliding-displace the liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, which causes damage to them.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at the position where the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in anticipation of the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, or the control tolerance (the liquid crystal display devices 523 are located close to each other). When a sufficient gap is set between the two so that the two do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), and the appearance (effect). Causes deterioration.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 formed in this way are arranged to face each other in a staggered posture while being connected as possible. That is, one side guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is attached to the other side guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other side guided member 522 of one slide member 520 is one side of the other slide member 520. They are arranged to face each other on the guided member 521.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are brought into contact with each other at the close position due to slide displacement in the direction in which they are close to each other, one of the slide members 520 is one and the other is one. When the side guided member 521 is relatively displaced (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 in the other (other and one) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can be tilted with respect to the direction of slide displacement, respectively).

Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431, each gear 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, so that the position where the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is closer. Can be set to position. As a result, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state where the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (effect) can be improved accordingly.

Here, in the present embodiment, the other side guided member 522 is provided with a detected portion, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the cover member 420, and the detected portion is provided. Is detected by the detection sensor, so that it is detected that the slide member 520 is slid and displaced to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the posture of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, the positional deviation of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor) can be suppressed. As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of a slide rail 510 and a slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other). Although the case where the two sets are arranged facing each other (that is, the phases are different from each other by 180 °) is described, the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment has a slide member 520 and a slide member having different configurations. The 2520 is provided, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 46 is a reference view, which is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 45, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. Moreover, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, two sets of slide rails 510 have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, have a phase of 180), as in the case of the first embodiment. They are placed facing each other in different postures.

In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the case of the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of the other set (lower side of FIGS. 44 and 45).

In the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520, the one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520, and the other side guided member 522 in one set of slide members 520 are It is arranged so as to face the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520.

That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 2520 have slide displacements of both members 520 and 2520 in the plan view shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. It is arranged in a line-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual line located in the center in the direction of and perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46, as described above, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since they are arranged facing each other in the posture, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 is the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520 and the other side in one set of slide members 520. The guided member 522 is arranged so as to face the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520.

That is, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 520 are centered in the direction of slide displacement of both members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. It is arranged in a point-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual point (that is, the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300) located at the center in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. NS.

Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, it is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in one set of slide members 520. The displacement component in the direction of inertia and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in alternating directions (point-symmetrical directions, that is, the base member 400 and the cover member 420. The base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of the arrow R in FIG. 46 with respect to the back case 300 in order to give the rotational inertia. That is, it was difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides is applied. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 are in the same direction (directions that are line-symmetrical). ).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, it is possible to prevent the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, showing a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 is arranged on the right side in the front view.

In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise) from the first rotation position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47)). The one-sided guided member 521 of one set of slide members 520 and the one-sided guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520 are arranged on the lower side in the front view (lower side in the vertical direction), respectively. Can be done.

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and an inertial force is applied due to the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement, the slide displacement The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of (the displacement component in the direction of pressing the slide members 520 and 2520 against the slide rail 510 (regulating the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) is vertically upward (direction opposite to the gravity direction, the figure) 47 upward direction).

As a result, when the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-mentioned direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity is eliminated. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, in a state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (a state in which the slide members 520 and 2520 are slidly displaced in the horizontal direction), the one-side guided member 521 is the other-side guided member 522. Although the case where the member is arranged on the lower side in the vertical direction is described, the one-side guided member 521 of the third embodiment is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction with respect to the other side guided member 522. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. Moreover, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 (lower side).

That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position, the one-sided guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one-sided cover in the other set of slide members 520. The guide member 521 and the guide member 521 are respectively arranged on the left side in the front view.

When the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment configured in this way also exerts an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, as in the case of the second embodiment, on the other hand. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the set of slide members 2520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in the same direction (line). The orientation can be symmetrical).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, it is possible to prevent the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, showing a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged in the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the above is arranged on the left side in the front view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 50)). The one-sided guided member 521 of one set of slide members 2520 and the one-sided guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 520 can be arranged on the upper side in the front view (upper side in the vertical direction), respectively. ..

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement is caused. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component that generates a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be set downward in the vertical direction (gravity direction, lower side in FIG. 50). As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member 520 from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is provided with rotary drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotary drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to easily suppress the slide member 520 from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged so that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is oriented away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the above can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced by a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member 520 from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in the center in the width direction has been described, but the rotating shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is located at an eccentric position in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. Is arranged in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 according to the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 52 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in a state where the liquid crystal surface 523a is directed to the front side, and FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic front view showing the decorative surface 523b facing the front side. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism 4500 in the state. Note that FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) show a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged at a separated position.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, a columnar rotating shaft 4523c is projected from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523, as in the case of the first embodiment. The rotating shaft 4523c is rotatably supported in the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c of the one-side guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other-side guided member 4522.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c, and the rotation causes the display surface 523a. It is possible to form a posture in which the face is directed to the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

In this case, the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are separated from the opposing member 525 in the direction of slide displacement from the forming position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (FIG. 52 (a). ) And FIG. 52 (b) in the vertical direction).

In the rotary drive mechanism of the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are separated from the rotary drive mechanism of the first embodiment by the amount that the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. A third gear 4535 is additionally arranged between the and.

Here, as described above, the facing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surfaces (display surface 523a and decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 are arranged. Light is formed so as to be able to irradiate light toward the connecting surface), and the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is played from between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 and facing each other (gap). It is possible to make the effect visible to the person.

Therefore, if the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, a space (gap) through which the light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 passes cannot be secured, and the light can be effectively used by the player. It cannot be visually recognized.

In this case, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display from the facing distance through the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420. Since the device 81 is made visible to the player, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured to the maximum extent. On the other hand, the facing distance between the pair of facing members 525 (the vertical distance in FIG. 52A) must be limited to the arrangement space (that is, the size can be accommodated between the facing portions of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300. It cannot be expanded because it receives).

Therefore, if the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and the space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the facing spaces, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it becomes difficult to secure a gap for irradiating, reflecting, or passing the LED light, while narrowing the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 in order to secure such a gap. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the forming positions of the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are eccentrically positioned on one side in the direction of slide displacement, and therefore, depending on the rotating position of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The distance (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 facing each other can be increased or decreased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side. .. Therefore, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of protrusion of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced accordingly, and as a result, the player can reduce the third symbol display device. A visible area for visually recognizing the 81 can be secured.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotated so that the decorative surface 523b is oriented toward the front side, so that the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased. .. Therefore, a space (gap) through which the light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can pass can be secured, and as a result, the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 and the facing member 525 can be secured. It is possible to effectively perform the effect of making the player visually recognize the light.

Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to arrange the facing member 525 at a position away from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, to increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the slide mechanism 4500 can be miniaturized. That is, while allowing the slide mechanism 4500 to be accommodated between the outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of the light emitted from the LED are compatible. Can be done.

Next, when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa, a method of suppressing the driving force required for the rotation will be described.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed in close positions in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place in. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has a posture in which the display surface 523a faces the front side, while the other side (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed toward the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be arranged at a position eccentric to the upper side of the center in the vertical direction, so that the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400. Can be made to.

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 53 (a)), and the second rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (b) is changed from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (a). When rotating to, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by a broken arrow in FIG. 53 (b)) can be a locus that moves downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can rotate by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed in close positions in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place in. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity with rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54 (a)) is in a posture in which the display surface 523a is directed toward the front side. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the side that moves to the side opposite to the direction of gravity with rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54 (a)) has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is eccentric to the side that moves away from the center of rotation of the base member 400 and moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation (that is, the position of the center of gravity G). It can be arranged on the left side of FIG. 54 (a).

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 54 (a)), and the first rotation shown in FIG. 54 (b) is performed from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54 (a). When rotating to a position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by a broken arrow in FIG. 54 (b)) can be a locus that moves downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can rotate by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. Further, FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56 (b). It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 formed of a resin material and forming a passage through which the game ball flows down. The passage member 5600 has a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (left-right direction in FIG. 55 (b)) and a rolling plate 5610 on the front side (55 (b) front side of the paper surface). The front wall portion 5620 arranged, the back wall portion 5630 disposed on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)), and a part of the back wall portion 5630 are placed on the back side. It mainly includes an overhanging wall portion 5640 formed by overhanging.

The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface is a rolling surface of a game ball, and is formed by a first portion formed by inclining downward from an end portion in the width direction of the game board 13 and a first portion thereof. A W-shaped rolling surface in front view is formed from a second portion that is inclined upward from the end portion on the downward inclination side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed in the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and descends toward the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)). A recess 5611 that is inclined and a recess 5612 that is recessed in the uppermost portion of the second portion and is inclined downward toward the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)) are arranged.

The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and prevents the game ball from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is notched at a portion corresponding to the recess 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball accepted in the recess 5611 can be dropped.

The overhanging wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for allowing a game ball that rolls on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and is a rolling member. The game ball that rolls the plate 5610 and is received in the recess 5612 is received in the overhanging wall portion 5640.

Here, the operation unit 200 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the overhanging wall portion 5640 is projected from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL) is used to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. )'S movable range is limited, and its effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is set to a slightly larger dimension, while the depth dimension from the front surface to the inner wall surface of the back wall portion 5630 (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 57) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by a virtual plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630 at the top having an arcuate cross section in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 56, upper side in FIG. 57). An opening 5641 is formed in the chamfered portion so that the width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

That is, since the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball is projected outward from the opening 5641, the entire game ball is inner circumference. Compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size surrounding the overhanging wall portion 640, the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 to the back surface side can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 6600 according to the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 57. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions erected from the back wall portion 5630 and a wall portion connecting the erected tips of the pair of wall portions. Is formed into a U-shaped cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion on the overhanging tip side (upper side of FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

The opening 6641 is formed so that its width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) is reduced from the inner wall surface side to the outer wall surface side of the overhanging wall portion 6640. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is formed as an inclined surface. As a result, the amount of protrusion that allows a part of the game ball to project outward from the opening 6641 is expanded, and the overhang dimension L2 of the overhang wall portion 5640 can be suppressed, while the peripheral edge portion (with the inclined surface) of the opening 6641. It is possible to secure the maximum thickness dimension at the portion to be formed) and to secure the rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 on the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhanging wall portion 5640. The angle of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5461 is in contact with the game ball. As a result, while ensuring a projectable amount that allows a part of the game ball to project outward from the opening 6641, it is possible to suppress the reception of the object on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) ( That is, it is possible to suppress damage to the overhanging wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening 6641) by receiving the game ball at the ridgeline portion S having a relatively high rigidity).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a back wall portion 7652 arranged to face the front wall portion 7651, and their front surfaces. A side wall portion 7653 is provided on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652, respectively, and a passage through which the game ball flows down is formed by a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by each of the wall portions 7651 to 7653. ..

Here, the passage member 7600 projects the front wall portion 7651 and a part of the back wall portion 7652 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) toward the back wall portion, thereby causing the front inner peripheral wall portion 7600 to project. A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is formed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (to the right in FIG. 59 (a)). Since the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening 7654 to the outside, not only the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed, but also the damage and wear of the passage member 7600 can be suppressed. It can be done easily.

That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (to the right in FIG. 59 (a)), it is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, which has no opening 7654 and has a relatively high rigidity, and can prevent the game ball from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear at the peripheral edge of the opening 7654, which are relatively low in rigidity due to the opening formation of the opening 7654.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In FIG. 60, the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a) and a back wall portion 7652 (back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) as in the case of the seventh embodiment. And from the side wall portion 7653, a passage having a substantially rectangular cross section and being bent is formed. In the present embodiment, an opening 8654 is formed in the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. Since the opening 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening 8654 to the outside, the overhanging dimension L4 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set at a position overlapping with the range Rg which is the displacement locus of a part of the game ball protruding from the opening 8654. As a result, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the effect of the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

In this case, the passage member 8600 is provided with a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting the passage of the game ball on the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening 8654, respectively. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654 because the game ball does not exist in the passage of the passage member 8600. It is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it has not been done.

Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is included in the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the game ball is not projected from the opening 8654. By controlling the slide unit SL to be displaced to a position where it overlaps with, it is possible to avoid the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slide-displaced due to the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of rod-shaped bodies (one side member and the other side) are described. Members) are arranged, and the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are moved by sliding the one-side guided member 521 (rail-side member 521a) and the other-side guided member 522 along the pair of rod-shaped bodies. It may be slide-displaced.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a configuration that enables relative displacement between the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b in the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The structure may be such that the relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may coincide with the axis of the rotating shaft 523c.

Further, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotating shaft 523c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center of the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be located eccentrically on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, the position of the center of gravity along the axial center of the rotating shaft 523c is preferably eccentric to the side close to the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism. This is because the bias of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be utilized as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are arranged so as to be slidable with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Members of other displacement forms (displacement members) may be arranged.

For example, a pair of rotating bodies rotatably supported by the cover member 420 may be provided with a rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 as a point of symmetry, and the rotation directions of the two are opposite. As a result, the inertial forces associated with the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be canceled out, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, it is possible to facilitate only the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at predetermined rotational positions with respect to the back case 300.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and pinion gear 532, first gear 533 and second gear 534) is arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 has been described. The rotation drive mechanism is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotation drive mechanism may be arranged on the other side guided member 521.

In this case, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and an inertial force is applied due to the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement, the liquid crystal display device 523 is operated. Due to the rotational inertia of the liquid crystal, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement from becoming too large. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction while being able to suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 by the inertial force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passage of the game ball flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other members are objects. May be. For example, it may be a spherical member used for the production outside the game area.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member A part of the rear peripheral wall portion 7652a may be displaced from the opening 8654 to a position where the passage member 8600 is inserted into the inside. In this case, the displacement region of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member toward the front side, and it is possible to give power by bringing it closer to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the range Rg on the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a, the portion overlapping the range Rg on the back surface of the back outer wall 7652a of the slide unit SL can be independently displaced. As a variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the portion of the variable structure. As a result, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to take measures to quickly suppress the interference with the game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126. In the first control example, when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a, the over-winning effect is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over prize during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

As an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation is high is easily displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential shape. As a result, even when the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In addition to displaying a suggestion for right-handed hitting, a voice suggesting right-handed hitting (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed") may be output. As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured in.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed straddling the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the effect can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (sliding) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven left and right (slide). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 62A, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

In this control example, the display is configured based on the image data of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Specifically, the image data represented by the coordinates (0,0) to (X, Y3) is used, and the image data in the region from (0,0) to (X, Y1) is the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The image data displayed on the upper display surface 523a and in the area from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image in the area from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) is displayed. The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 62B is a schematic view showing the content of the effect at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62B, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a close position, and a button on which the characters "PUSH" are drawn is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. The production is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In this control example, the effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) provided on the slide member 520 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is downward. By sliding it downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), the display area used for the effect display is expanded, and the symbol (in FIG. 63, a symbol imitating a "fish") is enlarged using the enlarged display area. An effect display is executed to make the player or increase the number of symbols.

With this configuration, it is possible to display a wide variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a position where they abut, the upper half of the symbol is on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower half of the symbol is on the lower side. The display is controlled so that the display surface 523a2 displays.

Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is diverted from the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately prepare display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the amount of data can be reduced.

In this control example, the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81, but other configurations may be used, for example, displaying on the third symbol display device. Even if the display area for displaying information related to the game to be played (for example, display of the number of stored memories or display of abnormality) is configured to be visible regardless of the position of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. good.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts the slide movement from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)) and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). The same display objects (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid to move. This can be realized by moving the display position of the displayed object according to the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

Then, as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. The third symbol display device 81 displays a symbol corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 and the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and displays the third symbol. The symbol to be displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), and the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in the order of the display surface (middle design).

In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, and lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, it is clear to the player which symbol is displayed. It is a difficult state to grasp. In this state, since each symbol is overlapped so that the symbol (middle symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the most difficult to see, what kind of symbol is the last symbol to appear to the player? It is possible to execute the production while expecting the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63 (b) will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progressed.

As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, as the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated from each other to display the third symbol display device 81. By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually expanded. Even in this state, the same display objects (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid.

Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed so that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol is gradually reduced. With this configuration, for the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, the display data corresponding to the specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63A) is displayed. It is only necessary to execute the control of moving the position according to the slide movement of each display surface, and there is an effect that the load of the display control can be reduced.

Further, the effect display that gradually reduces the overlap of the symbols is simply fixed by actually moving the display surface (upper display 523a1, lower display surface 523a2, display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that the sense of incongruity given to the player can be suppressed as compared with the case of executing on the display surface.

In this case, the timing of slide movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) is changed, or the slide movement speed is changed, and the slide movement of each display surface is supported. Display control should be executed. This has the effect of further enhancing the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 64 (b) will be described. FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progressed.

By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (the display surfaces are separated to the maximum extent). It will be in a state where it slides to the position). In this state, the player can visually recognize the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols, so that the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the display effect of this time can be grasped.

In this control example, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are executed. , Other than that, it may be used. For example, after displaying that the special symbol has won the jackpot with the third symbol, it is used for a technique (so-called probabilistic promotion production) that notifies whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot by using an effect display. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the display contents when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated will be described. FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing an aspect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) shows the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 on the left and right. It is a figure which shows the mode in the case of abutting in a direction.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is sub. By correcting according to the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to display the same display mode as before the rotation. Even in this case, since the display data displayed on each display surface is diverted from the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to separately prepare the display data and the amount of data can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Next, the reversing operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In this control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the above-mentioned display surfaces (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) are provided on one surface side thereof, and on the other surface side. Is provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1 and lower decorative surface 523b2).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 68, an effect mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted at a position covering the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is facing the front side, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which started to turn to the side (the state which the decorative surface started to turn to the front side). The sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state of concealing most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side. ”The main effect is switched to the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. A decorative symbol Z indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed at the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, and a decorative symbol Z on the front side is displayed on the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2. The sub LED 290 is arranged at the corresponding position. FIG. 68 is a view showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are facing the front side, respectively. By inverting, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected (contacted and arranged) in parallel) to form an apple pattern, so that the characters "CHANGE" are formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is decorated with a corrugation, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip of each. Among them, the bottom LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of a sub LED 290. FIG. 68A is a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B is a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is inverted and the display surface becomes invisible, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed notification mode, which is a suggestion mode of the launch position of the game ball during the jackpot game, will be described. FIG. 69A is a right-handed notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The characters "right-handed" are displayed curved in a three-circle shape (ring shape), and each of these characters is rotated clockwise and displayed during the jackpot game. In this control example, in the variable winning device 65, the game ball that has flowed down the right side (right side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 has flowed down the left side (left side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81. The game ball is placed at a position where it is easier to win a prize than the ball (lower right side of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle so as to pass the game ball through the left flow path and perform the game so as to win a prize in the first starting port 64 by operating the handle so as to have a left-handed firing intensity. The ball is fired, but during the jackpot game, the game is performed by operating the handle so that the firing strength is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path.

Here, the right-handed notification mode is displayed to notify that the steering wheel is operated with the firing strength at which the game ball passes through the right-handed flow path, and the right-handed character rotates to the right to notify the right-handed flow path. The position (direction) of the handle and the rotation direction of the handle are simultaneously notified.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game to conceal the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the upper right side of the upper display surface 523a1 in a right-handed notification mode. Further, FIG. 69 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated to the right. In this case, it is displayed on the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (the actual display position is unchanged from FIG. 69 (b)). In this case as well, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the right-handed character display direction or the character rotation display direction.

As described above, in this control example, by rotating the right-handed character display in a ring shape and displaying it, even if the displayed display surface is rotated, the correct position is notified without changing the display mode. Can be done. Therefore, the load of the display control process can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various right-handed notification modes are prepared.

In this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed in characters, but a symbol of an arrow configured in a ring shape or a symbol imitating a game ball may be rotated. Further, a design imitating a handle that changes the firing intensity of the game ball may be rotated and displayed.

Next, a modified example of the right-handed notification mode in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modified example of the right-handed notification mode. In this modification, it is changed in that three ring-shaped arrow symbols curved to the right are added to the back side of the right-handed character display.

FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area of the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in a display area composed of a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. In the first area α, an arrow pattern curved to the right is displayed by rotating it to the right, and in the second area β and the third area γ, the characters “right-handed” are displayed along the ring shape, respectively. It is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in the layer above the arrow symbol that is rotated and displayed, and the arrow symbol that is rotated and displayed is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. In addition, three arrow symbols are set, and when the arrow symbol of 1 moves to the back surface of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is variably set according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 147 (a) is a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow symbol. It is set. Therefore, the arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and the right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the character display layer of the third area β is set below the arrow symbol layer, and the character display layer of the first area α is set above the arrow symbol.

With this configuration, the arrow symbol pointing to the right is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and the correct position of the right flow path can be notified to the player. In this modified example, the position where the arrow is displayed was changed by changing the layer setting, but the position is not limited to this, and the rotating coordinates of the right-handed notification mode are changed and set (the right-handed notification mode is subordinated). It may be configured to be variable by rotating (rotating according to the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523).

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details for setting the effects described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described. In this control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and moved, the effect of correcting the display position of the symbol according to the amount of the slide movement is performed.

Specifically, the symbol 2 is based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid in response to the upward variation of the upper display surface 523a1 from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b). The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

Further, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid and moved in accordance with the downward variation of the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbols expand as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves. The effect can be displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) are reached. A second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning of the prize is provided, and each of these areas is hit by the first hit according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a general drawing execution area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a ball on either side. The value of the random number counter C4 per second is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal start port (through gate) 67 of the above.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 71. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "0" is for low probability. It is stored in the random number table for the first time. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time are duplicated values. A random number value that is a big hit may be set so as not to be. If there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot of the special symbol is changed by changing the random value that becomes the jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 29", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the type is not limited to one, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 64.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, the voice lamp control device 113 also has the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a set, and more detailed fluctuations correspond to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern commands output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of winning random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is only "1 second x 2 times". It will be released, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74.

FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73A. FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73A) is a table in which the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the first random number table 202a, a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol are displayed. A jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is provided, and the number of determination values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by making the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73B) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected respectively. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the jackpot B.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, a lottery as to whether or not the probability change state is reached). However, in the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery for whether or not the probability change state is reached is not executed).

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)). At least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74 (d)) is specified. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving game state is set in addition to this.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 74B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 74 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2. The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, and acquires it from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 74 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that becomes an deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Probability change flag 203g, Probability change setting flag 203h, Probability change pass counter 203i, Winning number counter 203j, Operation counter 203k, Notification counter 203m, Remaining ball timer flag 203n, Remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time reduction / medium counter 203t, a sign flag 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on winning a prize is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 640 (with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 up to 4. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the second winning opening 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 up to 4. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 85).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the first special symbol N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the first special symbol N2) is , The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. be.

The voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the reserved ball number (waiting number of times) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90). : No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power off occurs, the state immediately before the power off is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switching switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off based on the on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65a5 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to turn on and turning on the power again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated one by one when passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 (see S1511 in FIG. 98). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (see S1202 in FIG. 95). .. On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65a5 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, the voice "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1402 of the notification processing (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is urged to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 12 rounds, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In this control example, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual state, and the jackpot B is obtained. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65a5.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When this probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. Indicates that no time has passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65a5. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probabilistic change switch 65a5 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and not to be determined to have passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65a5 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection of passage through a magnetic sensor due to radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this control example, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

The sign flag 203u acquires the winning information that becomes a big hit when the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, and the winning information that has already been put on hold (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). It is a flag indicating that the winning information that becomes the jackpot A (that is, there is a possibility of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state) is stored in the information). This sign flag 203u is changed based on the winning information when the winning information that becomes a big hit when the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state is acquired in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 88) (S507: Yes in FIG. 88). Is set to ON when it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in a probabilistic game state when is started (that is, there is winning information that becomes a jackpot A by then) (S508: Yes in FIG. 88). NS. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the winning information command indicating that the sign flag 203u is turned on (see S511 in FIG. 88). Then, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (that is, when the probability variation game state is entered) in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game (see S1304 in FIG. 96). Set to off. Although not shown, when it is determined in the ending process (FIG. 96) that the jackpot game based on the winning information with the sign flag 203u turned on has ended (that is, the jackpot game of jackpot A has been executed). The sign flag 203u is also set to off even when the game does not shift to the probabilistic game state).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotary motor 431, reverse motor 531). , Sub LED 290, clock generator (CLK) 900 and the like are connected respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding the display surface 523a, which is the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and has the upper display surface 523a1 in the parallel direction to the gaming machine, to move the motor, and is composed of a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is composed of a stepping motor which is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2, respectively, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 are provided. The 523a2 and the 523a2 can be rotated independently of each other. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently so that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the back side. Is.

The sub LED 290 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative symbol Z (decorative symbol Z) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( It is configured to notify the player by blinking that the special symbol is changing instead of (a symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing).

As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms cycle to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The clock generator 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for blinking control of the sub LED 290 and the decorative symbol Z at the same timing by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position where it overlaps the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 blinks 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. It is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing and prevent the player from being confused.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and various other types necessary for controlling the game. Data, programs, etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (disengagement, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Here, the details of the over winning table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over winning table 222b. The over-winning table 222b is a table used for selecting an over-winning effect in the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the over-winning table 222b includes a winning over-winning table 222b1 and a predictive over-winning table. 222b2 and a detached over winning table 222b3 are provided.

The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the winning over winning table 222b1 defines the production content selected as the over winning effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and differs depending on the number of rounds. It has become.

Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and " If it is "150 to 198", it becomes "foam", and if it is "199", it becomes "fish school".

"Fish school" is selected as the production content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when there is a big hit winning information in the reserved winning information). By displaying the effect of "fish school" as the over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the winning information held for the player includes the winning information that is a big hit.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "100 to 189". If it is, it becomes a "foam", and if it is "190-199", it becomes a "fish school". In this way, as the round in the jackpot game progresses, the jackpot game is configured so that the over-winning effect indicating that the winning information that becomes the jackpot is held and the expectation is high is easily displayed. Even if it takes a long time, the player's interest can be improved.

In the predictive over winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information, and the probabilistic gaming state is reached by the time the fluctuation based on the held winning information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of shifting to (that is, when it is not certain that a big hit will be made after that, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none". (That is, it is not executed), and if it is "150 to 199", it becomes a "bubble".

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "100 to 199". If so, it becomes a "bubble".

The out-of-order over winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit in the reserved winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 179", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none". (That is, it is not executed), and if it is "180 to 199", it becomes a "bubble".

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 159", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "160 to 199". If so, it becomes a "bubble".

As described above, the out-of-order over-winning table 222b3 is configured so that "foam" is less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the predictive over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubbles" are displayed as an over-winning effect, the player can be expected to become a big hit after that, and the player's interest can be improved.

In this control example, as the over-winning effect, any one of three types of "none", "foam", and "fish school" is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be selected from four types, or it may be naturally selected from two types. Further, the effect content may be configured so that "none" (that is, not executed) is not selected, and the over-winning effect is displayed each time the over-winning is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over prize has been won.

Further, as an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls.

In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select an ending effect at the end of the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the ending table 222c includes a hit ending table 222c1 and a predictive ending table 222c2. , A detached ending table 222c3 is provided.

The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the hit ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 19", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

In the predictive ending table 222c2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information, and it will be in the probabilistic gaming state by the time the fluctuation based on the held winning information starts. It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the predictive ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect, and "bubble" is used as the over-winning effect during the jackpot game. Is different depending on the number of times selected (the value of the bubble number counter 223j).

Specifically, when the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "0 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 149", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed). ) Is selected, "foam" is selected if it is "150 to 179", and "special foam" is selected if it is "180 to 199".

Further, when the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "5 to 15" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. If it is "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if it is "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

When the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "16 or more" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and " If it is "50 to 99", "foam" is selected, and if it is "100 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

In this way, when many "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select the ending effect of "foam" or "special foam" that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit after that. It is configured as follows. As a result, even though many "bubbles" are selected (displayed) in the over-winning production, a production with a low expectation (for example, "none") is selected in the ending production, so that the player's game It is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in motivation.

Further, when the ending effect is selected using the predictive ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur thereafter. Therefore, if many "bubble" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effects is high. Will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, the privilege that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The out-of-order ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information that will be a big hit if the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect are defined in the detached ending table 222c2.

Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 159", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and if it is "160 to 189", "bubble". Is selected, and if it is "190-199", "special bubble" is selected.

In this control example, only in the sign ending table 222c2, the provisions of the effect counter 223f and the effect content are changed according to the value of the bubble count counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same may be applied to the hit ending table 222c1 and the miss ending table 222c3.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the sub-liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523 are driven. Information is stored.

Specifically, the slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving the slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are rotationally moved in the circumferential direction. A rotary drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotary motor 311 to be driven, and a reverse drive scenario 222d3 for driving the reverse motor 531 that reverses the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, respectively, are provided.

First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). In the slide drive scenario 222d1, set values (operating speed (pps), set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display, The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are specified.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), an operation for sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m (outward route). Information related to (operation) is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

Here, since the operating speed of 50 pps outputs 50 pulses (steps) per second to the motor driver, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate in 100 steps (moving from a separated position to a close position). The time required to do this is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

Information related to the operation (return operation) for sliding-displace the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m is stored. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "5001" because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are placed close to each other. It is 5 seconds after the slide displacement to the separated position is started (that is, 3 seconds after the slide displacement for 2 seconds is completed).

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "7001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes "7001" 2 seconds after the operation for sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is started (that is, that is). (When the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is completed). By reading out this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

As described above, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and then are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then 2 again. It slides from the near position to the separated position over a second.

Next, the contents of the rotation drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (c). Similarly, in the rotary drive scenario 222d2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are in the first rotation position (upper display) corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right at the position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the second rotation position (positions above and below the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2). Information related to the operation (outbound operation) for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction.

The operation for rotating the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the second rotation position to the first rotation position in the circumferential direction corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m (return operation). ) Is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

As described above, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds. After being maintained at, it rotates again from the second rotation position to the first position over 3 seconds.

Next, the contents of the reversal drive scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (d). Similarly, in the reverse drive scenario 222d3, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side) corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information related to the operation (outward route operation) for reversing from the reversing position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation (return operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to reverse from the reverse position to the normal position again is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

As described above, in the reversal drive scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses from the normal position to the reversal position over 2 seconds, is then maintained at the reversal position for 3 seconds, and then again takes 2 seconds from the reversal position to the normal position. Flip to position.

In this control example, the operation for one motor is defined in each drive scenario, but the operation is not limited to this. For example, a drive scenario for driving the reversing motor 531 after driving the slide motor 431 may be specified. As a result, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid and displaced to close positions and then inverted. As a result, the variation of driving (displacement) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub-winning number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble count counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z. Is provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. A detailed description will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effects and various lottery. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round has been executed in a jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting the over-winning effect in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over-winning effect according to the value of the round number counter 223 g, the over-winning effect can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

The sub-winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the round of the jackpot game. The sub-winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control device 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and is a normal winning or over winning depending on the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Then, although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the “fish school” effect has been selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set to on when the over-winning effect of "fish school" is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set to off in the ending setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 104). See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probabilistic game state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Further, it is possible to prevent the so-called downfall, in which the effect of "foam" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over-winning effect.

The bubble count counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times that the “bubble” effect is selected as the over-winning effect. The bubble count counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the over-winning effect of "bubble" is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble count counter 223j is used when selecting the ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generator 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

Specifically, when it is determined in the lamp editing process (see FIG. 107) that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is added one by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, the sub LED 290 is turned on and the sub symbol is displayed, and when the value reaches 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is hidden. It is determined.

The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 in 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start the effect such as lighting the LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and 1 is added.

The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz). For example, it may change in a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may change in a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high (that is, the interval of change becomes short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may also be short. As a result, even when the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing the change.

The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing for executing control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the variation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, when a drive scenario is set in the drive scenario storage area 223n, which will be described later, one is added one by one. According to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, information for driving the motor set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) are acquired. ) Is driven and controlled.

The drive scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. In the drive scenario storage area 223 m, when the variation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106), the corresponding drive scenario 222d is stored. NS. Various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven and controlled based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223 m.

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 and the clock generator 900 are connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are bus lines on the output side of the input port 238. It is connected via 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when the incoming ball is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear A corresponding to the "city stage", the rear B corresponding to the "empty stage", and the rear C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the 81, and the image controller 237 displays the image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image horizontally from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round effects, and demo effects are available.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the player can have it. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to a game information-related command, one display related to a jackpot-related command, and one display data table corresponding to a round effect and a demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), The symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 82).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. 15). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 109) (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111B) and a simple display setting process so that the image when the power is turned on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later, which describes the instruction contents for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 111 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 83) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a rear image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 111 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, it is performed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generator 900 is also input to the voice lamp control device 113, and by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223 m, the effect can be easily synchronized with the sound lamp control device 113. Can be made to.

Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is added one by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 in 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start the effect such as lighting the LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and 1 is added.

Although the details will be described later, the clock output of the clock generator 900 is started after the start-up process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 in FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, after the start-up process of the display control device 114, which requires more processing time than the voice lamp control device 113, is completed (that is, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed). Since the clock output is started, the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has an area of a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and an inversion amount storage area 233p3.

This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates and display angles of each image constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. As a result, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidably moved or rotated, a suitable effect can be displayed.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is other than the demo display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When they reach 299, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of jackpot A is set (16 rounds, etc.). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is different (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221).

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of whether or not it is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so the first obtained in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a jackpot of a special symbol, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a jackpot indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S502), and if the game state is a probabilistic change (S502: Yes), the first random number table 202a has a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the game state is not probable (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). In the process of S505, if the lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S505: Yes), a big hit is indicated, a winning information command including the big hit type is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S505: No), then whether or not the lottery result is a big hit if the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change game state. Determine (S507).

In the process of S507, if the lottery result is out of the game even if the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change game state (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the loss is set (S508). End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S507, if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then the probable change state is entered at the start of the fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is a possibility of this (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information or the pending winning information includes the winning information that is a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic state.

In the processing of S508, if there is no possibility of shifting to the probabilistic state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state) (S508: No), a prize indicating a loss is obtained. An information command is set (S509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, if there is a possibility that the state has shifted to the probabilistic change state at the start of the fluctuation (that is, there is a jackpot winning information that shifts to the probabilistic game state) (S508: Yes), there is a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the game and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to on (S511), the sign flag 203u is shown to be on, and the winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the process of S520 is set (S512), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability change game state is given until the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in this control example, by executing the processes S507 to S512, if there is winning information that is a big hit that can pass through the probability change switch 65a5, the lottery results at the high probability time and the low probability time are displayed. It can be acquired and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect in both the case where the probabilistic game state is given and the case where the probabilistic game state is not given.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 73 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 73 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 93, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 86) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 91 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 93). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), the number of rounds command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106). When it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is reached (S1106: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off just in case in the processing of S1009.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302). If it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1303), and this process is terminated. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65a5 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game is determined. You can play the game with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter for 2 seconds in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, by providing a notification counter 203 m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), the notification command is set (S1406). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is added and updated by 1, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is executed. Set (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). After that, the process of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball ejection time has been in progress since the opening / closing door 65f1 was closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the process of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the process of S1508 is executed.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1512). After that, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to on (S1515). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is ON (S1516). If the probabilistic valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). When it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the probability variation effective flag 203q is set to off (S1519). The probabilistic change effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65a5 from being improperly passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65a5 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormal processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1601). If it is outside the round validity period (S1601: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1603). After that, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1605) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prize counters 203j) match. (S1607).

If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). After that, the process of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value 0 (S1610). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1611), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1815 (see FIG. 101) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 of FIG. 101), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1815. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1815 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1815. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1817 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the data shifts to S1708.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1817 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1708 is performed via the processes of S1704 to S1706. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1710, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1711), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that when the processing of S1708 is reached via the processing of S1704 to S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1801 this time was executed (S1801), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1802 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1813 and the command determination process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1810 is completed, the sub liquid crystal drive process is executed in order to drive the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) (S1811). Details of this sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

After the sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1818), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to the process of S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the process of S1908, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1908. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1907, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command ("Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1910).

Next, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command has been received (S1911). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the process of S1913. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

On the other hand, in the process of S1911, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of S1913 as it is.

In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

Next, the jackpot-related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S1912). This jackpot-related process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related process, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223 g (S2004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223 g (S2005), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received in the processing of S2006 (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2008.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is larger than 10 (S2008). In the processing of S2008, when the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls than the predetermined winning number (10 pieces) in one round have entered the specific winning opening 65a (S 2008: Yes). This is the case (so-called over-winning). In this case, the over-winning process is executed (S2009), and this process is terminated. The details of the over-winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), in order to execute the normal winning effect, the normal effect command is set and the present End the process.

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011).

If it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S2011 (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing is terminated. do. The details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not the V-pass command has been received (S2014).

In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, and an effect suggesting that the probability change game state is given is executed. A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this process ends.

Here, the over-winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this over winning process (S2009). This over-winning process (S2009) is executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect based on over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the over-winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). When it is determined that there is winning information (S2103: Yes), the over-winning effect is selected from the winning over-winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103). , S2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the processing of S2103 (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the processing of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the sign over winning table 222b2 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. The winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the processing of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), it is over from the out-of-order over winning table 222b3 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. The winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2107, a display over-winning command indicating the over-winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to the process of S2108.

In the process of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is a "school of fish" (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to on (S2109), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not a "fish school" (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is a "bubble". (S2110). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "foam" (S2110), the bubble count counter 223j is added by 1 (S2111), and this process ends. In the process of S2111, the number of times "bubbles" are selected in the over prize is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times "bubbles" are selected (FIG. 104).

In the process of S2110, if it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not "bubble" (S2110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of over-winning differs depending on whether or not there is information that will be a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it will be a big hit after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the over-winning effect will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), in the over-winning effect, an effect suggesting that a probabilistic game state is given is already executed (displayed). Therefore, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probabilistic game state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is stored (S2204).

In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that the winning information that is the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205), the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2204, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is not stored (S2204: No), then the winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

In the processing of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), the effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2 and the process proceeds to S2209. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the off-ending ending table 222c3 and the processing of S2209 is performed. Move to.

In the processing of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the school flag 223i is set to off (S2210), and the value of the bubble count counter 223j is set. Set to 0 (S2211) to end this process.

In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot differs depending on whether or not there is information that will be a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it will be a jackpot after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player executes the game paying attention to the ending effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variation display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1813). This variation display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2306 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2303).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the processing of S2304 is completed, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S2303 has a drive scenario setting (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that there is a drive scenario setting (S2305: Yes), the corresponding drive scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d to the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the drive scenario is stored. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the process of S2312, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and has the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. The setting such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by is executed.

In the lamp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processing of S2402 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). ..

If it is determined in the process of S2403 that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the process of S2404 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is reached (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the value of the determined clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. do.

In the process of S2407, another process for turning on the lamp is executed, and this process is terminated.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute the lighting of the sub LED and the display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I try to do it. As a result, it is possible to control the sub LED to be turned on at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811). This sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, It is a process for driving (rotational drive, etc.).

In the sub-liquid crystal drive process (FIGS. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is not stored, the present process is terminated as it is because it is not the timing to drive the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the drive scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the drive scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

Then, in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223 m after addition (S2503). If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. The motor drive data is set (S2504) based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n, the drive data command is set (S2505), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2503, when it is determined that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223 m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario.

If it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 109, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2702, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2601) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2702. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2702 and S2702, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 109. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2603, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2604, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 123 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of the clock output is set for the clock generator 900 (S2607). As a result, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the voice lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output is started after both the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 start up. Can be accurately synchronized in.

After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). FIG. 111A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2902) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2903) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2903), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, in order to correct the drawing contents, a drawing correction process is executed (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905), which are determined in the task process (S2904), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). When it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is added by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2912) is executed to display S2904. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3003).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3103, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3106), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3102e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006). If there is a display variable type command (S3006: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3007), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S3202).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3203), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3202.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), and the jackpot is determined. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-mentioned jackpot-related command process for display (S3009), which is one process of the command determination process (see S2902 and FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301). S3301: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process proceeds to the process of S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3405), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3605), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display normal winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3307). If there is a display normal winning effect command (S3307: Yes), the normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

Here, the details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning effect command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display normal winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the normal winning effect command processing, first, a normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. Read from and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3705), the normal winning command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3307, if it is determined that there is no display normal winning effect command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ), If there is an over-winning effect command for display (S3309: Yes), the normal over-effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

Here, the details of the over-winning effect command processing (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command processing. This over-winning effect command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display over-winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the over-winning effect command processing, first, an over-winning effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over-winning effect indicated by the display over-winning effect command is determined, and the determined over-winning effect display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Next, based on the over-winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the over-winning effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3309, if it is determined that there is no display over winning effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. If it is determined in the process of S3311 that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the rear image change command is determined. If there is (S3010: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4001). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S4002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3010, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and there is an error command. If (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to the processing of S3001.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3012, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

If it is determined that there is a counter command in the process of S3014 (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to the process of S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing at which the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the timing of lighting the notified sub LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, the sub symbol is set in the sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. As a result, the sub symbol is displayed at the same timing as the timing at which the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113 with reference to the display clock counter 223 m, which is a counter synchronized with the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be synchronized and produced.

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), then it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), it is received. The drive data storage area 223p is updated (S3017) based on the command, and the process proceeds to S3001.

By the process of S3017, the display content (for example, the display angle) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

If it is determined that there is no drive data command in the process of S3016 (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

In the processing of S3001 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), The processing of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S301 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this process is performed. End the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 113 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S4205.

In S4205, the pointer update process is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4403), and if it is a demo display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4403: No). S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, the sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, the details of the sub-symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. This sub-symbol setting process is a process for displaying the sub-symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub LED 290 that is lit and controlled by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sub-symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a variable period (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the period is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), it is not the timing to display the sub-symbol displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is fluctuating (S4501), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is the lighting information.

When it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content acquired in the processing of S4206 of the display setting processing (see FIG. 119) Among them, the information of the sub symbol is set (changed) to lit, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the processing of S4206 of the display setting processing (see FIG. 119). Of these, the sub-design information is set (changed) to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the processing of S4207 is completed, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S4210).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S4311), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2904), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4216, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off instead of on (S4210: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S4218) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4217, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2912), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4703. Further, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2903) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S4802), and if it is the transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4807. Further, as a result of the processing of S4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to the process of S4813.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4813, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The discrimination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the above-mentioned drawing correction process (S2906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed in response to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), it is not necessary to correct the drawing content, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4902 in order to make a correction according to the driving state.

In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of movement that is being slid. (S4903), the process proceeds to S4904. In the process of S4903, by correcting the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3, the display position of the symbols 1 to 3 is integrally changed in response to the drive of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display). It is possible to improve the player's interest.

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the slide is not driven (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4904.

In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and display angles) of all the images are determined according to the amount of rotation being rotationally driven. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this process ends.

By the processing of S4905, the display coordinates (and the display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect is displayed even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2907), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4302 (S4303). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 111B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a, the over-winning effect is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over prize during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

As an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation is high is easily displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential shape. As a result, even when the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In addition to displaying a suggestion for right-handed hitting, a voice suggesting right-handed hitting (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed") may be output. As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured in.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed straddling the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the effect can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (sliding) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven left and right (slide). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine that displays an effect when the gaming ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area that can be seen by the player, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is produced according to the number of stored game balls. It was configured to change the content of the production. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the first control example described above, the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging the character strings (right-handed right-handed right-handed) suggesting right-handedness in a circumferential shape. The game machine that can preferably suggest that the game is in a right-handed gaming state even when the 81) is rotated has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the circumference thereof. The lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a shape are configured to suggest the gaming state. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is highlighted, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

In this second control example, with respect to the first control example, the variable winning device 65 is changed so that the winning game ball is stored in the area visible to the player, and the variable winning device 65 is over. A distribution member 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game ball and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member are provided, and a game state is provided on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. This is different from the point that the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting (the direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape. In addition, the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control process 113 have been partially changed. It differs in that it was done. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, in this control example, the difference is that the inside of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above is changed, and the other points are the same.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but in the variable winning device 65 in this control example, when the jackpot game is started, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, as in the first control example). , 15 times (round) repeatedly executed. In each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until a predetermined number (10) of balls are won).

In each round, up to a predetermined number of winning game balls are discharged by flowing down the normal winning flow path 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the game balls that have won more than a predetermined number (so-called over-winning game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

On the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1, a production unit for executing the production with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65 is formed. The details of this effect unit will be described with reference to FIG. 128. In each round game, more than 10 game balls (hereinafter referred to as over-winning) are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). The effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage flow path 65e4 is executed. In this control example, in each round, it is configured to show that when four or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 65e4, the reserved balls that become hits are stored in the reserved balls. As shown in FIG. 127, the distribution member 65c and the storage flow path 65e4 are arranged at positions that can be seen by the player. Therefore, by winning an over prize during the jackpot game, more prize balls are paid out than usual. In addition to the expectation for this, you can enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-prize game ball is guided to the storage flow path 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening having a height that allows one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has entered the opening is moved to the back side of the game board 13. A guide path is formed to guide the taxiing. Inside the specific winning opening 65a, a guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for causing the game ball to flow downstream is formed, and the guide hole and the over winning flow path 65e3 or a normal winning path described later are formed. It is formed so as to communicate with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

A winning flow path switching member 65b is arranged between the normal winning flow path 65e1 and the over winning flow path 65e3 so that the game ball can be distributed into the normal winning flow path 65e1 and the over winning flow path 65e3. Has been done. The winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward by an over-winning solenoid (not shown) so that the tip is oriented horizontally (see FIG. 128B) and is rotated downward so that the tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in a state (see FIG. 128 (a)). When the over-winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b rotates upward (see FIG. 128B), and when the over-winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b moves downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128 (a)).

The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow vertically downward in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128A), and is used to discharge the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. A discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is arranged in the discharge flow path 65e2. The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which the game balls flow down until 10 balls are won in each round, and the flowing game balls pass through the discharge flow path 65e2 and the probability change switch 65a5 is arranged. After being guided to, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The game ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same manner as the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is possible to store the game ball and use it for production.

The over winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow down to the left in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over winning flow path 65e3 (see FIG. 128B). Is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won more than 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3, an over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photosensor) for detecting the passage of the over-winning game ball is arranged. On the downstream side of the over-winning flow path 65e3, a distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game ball into the storage flow path 65e4 and the discharge flow path 65e2 is arranged.

The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than that of one game ball. A shaft portion formed so as to project to the back surface side is formed in the center of the distribution member 65c, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. The distribution member 65c is configured as a storage area 65c1 with a recess in which one game ball can be inserted. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c so that a game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can enter the storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 is configured so that when the game ball enters, the entire game ball fits within the storage area 65c1 so that even if the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation is not hindered. Has been done. The distribution member 65c always has a storage area 65c1 in the direction of 45 degrees to the upper right, which is a position (see FIG. 128 (a)) at which a game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can be received in the leader area 65c1. It is stopped with the opening facing, and two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over winning detection switch 65a2, the game ball is stored in the storage area 65c1 so that it rotates in either the left-right direction. It is configured. The direction of rotation is determined based on the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball stored in the reserved ball. Details will be described later, but if a reserved ball that will be a big hit is stored, a lottery will be executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball occurs, and if the lottery is won, it will be shaken. The split member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided by the storage flow path 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Then, the game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is allowed to flow down. If the lottery with a probability of 1/2 is not obtained, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right, and the game ball in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (distribution). Will be done.

When the hold ball that becomes a big hit is not stored in the hold ball in the hold (when the hold ball that becomes a big hit is stored when passing through the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing through the probability change switch 65a5)) , The lottery is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution member 65c is rotated and distributed to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned jackpot holding ball is stored. If a reserved ball that becomes a big hit when passing through the switch 65a5 is stored, the over winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and the distribution member 65c is on the right for more game balls. The game balls that rotate in the direction and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

As described above, the storage flow path 65e4 is formed with a storage area 65i capable of storing up to 6 over-winning balls at the terminal portion. The storage area 65i is configured to have a height at which the game balls can be stored in two stages, and is formed at a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging the game ball in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end portion. The storage switching member 65g is in a state in which the shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side is rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage region 65i and rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b). The state shown by the dotted line shown in)) and the state of being rotated downward with the tip facing vertically downward are configured to be rotatable. In this control example, at the start of the jackpot game, it is in a state of being rotated downward, and based on the ending start timing which is the end timing of the jackpot game, it is rotated upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and the storage area. The game ball in the 65i is configured to be discharged to the storage / discharge flow path 65e6. A storage / discharge switch 65a4 (photosensor or the like) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is arranged in an upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage / discharge flow path 65e6. The game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is configured so as not to be guided by the probability change switch 65a5.

Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a probability change switch 65a5, which are variable by the probability change solenoid 65k, are provided at the point where the discharge flow path 65e2 flows down. When the probabilistic solenoid 65k is on, the flowing game ball can pass through the probabilistic switch 65a5, and when the probabilistic solenoid 65k is off, the flowing game ball cannot (or is difficult) pass through the probabilistic switch 65a5. It is configured to be.

As described above, in the variable winning device 65 in this control example, the winning flow path switching member 65b is such that the game ball passes through the normal winning flow path 65e1 until the number of winning balls defined in each round is reached. Is controlled. Therefore, the flow path between the over-winning game ball and the over-winning game ball can be separated, and the over-winning game ball can be accurately detected.

In this control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in front of the effect unit (distribution member 65c, storage flow path 65e4, storage area 65i) so that it can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine 10. There is.

As described above, in this control example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c rotates, and an effect of whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the over prize has been won. The player can visually recognize that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirm the over-winning, and enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates in the left-right direction. can. The hit / fail determination result of the reserved balls stored in the hold can also be predicted by the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. In this control example, when a holding ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the game ball is configured to be guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability. Therefore, the distribution member 65c is used to guide the game ball to the storage area 65i. The determination result in the reserved ball can also be predicted by the frequency of distribution to. Therefore, the player can store the reserved ball that becomes a big hit in the reserved ball by allocating the game ball to the storage area 65i, and the big hit is continuously executed in a short period of time even after this big hit game. Can have expectations for. Further, in this control example, since the maximum number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set according to the judgment result stored in the hold, the hit / fail judgment result can be set early from the guided number. Can be predicted. Further, when 5 or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that the reserved balls that are big hits are stored in the hold, and the determination result is notified to the player at an early stage to promote the interest. Can be improved.

In this control example, it is configured to notify that the reserved balls that are big hits with 5 or more balls are stored, but the number or the like may be set as appropriate. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c may be appropriately set. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence rate of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). Further, the maximum number of balls in the reserved ball guided to the storage area 65i may be changed depending on the rate of occurrence of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game, or during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with characters or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are accumulated in the storage area 65i, the holding sequence is confirmed !!". Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution member 65c may be configured to distribute in a seesaw shape. In addition, all the over-winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the judgment result in the reserved ball is notified by the number of stored over-winning balls, and it is used for promotion production during the jackpot game from the normal symbol to the probabilistic symbol. You may. In this case, it is conceivable that the number of over-winning balls during the jackpot game is set so that promotion chances are given.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second control example, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. The differences are in that they are, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is driven and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, the distribution motor 65c2 is started to be driven, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is driven alternately counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2 second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over winning flow path 65e3. A position rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise around a position where the game ball can be accepted (a position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage flow path 65e4) and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (a position where the game ball flows down to the storage flow path 65e4). The game ball in the storage area 65c1 is moved alternately with the position where the game ball flows down to the out flow path 65e5 (see FIG. 128).

The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp output device 113, and is lit and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The direction notification LED 295 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and five (295f to 295j) on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five (295a to 295e) on the lower decorative surface 523b2, for a total of ten. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the game state is a game state in which the player strikes right-handed, the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to turn clockwise (clockwise), suggesting that the player strikes right-handed. (Notification) When the game state is a left-handed gaming state, the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is controlled to turn counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting that the left-handed hit is performed. (Notified).

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The storage number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage number counter 203v is added by 1 when the distribution motor drive is set with the distribution destination as the storage flow path 65e4 in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133) (FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether the game balls will be distributed to the storage area in excess of the storage upper limit number. Referenced for. Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134) according to the reserved winning information (that is, according to the expected degree of subsequent big hit) (FIG. 134). See S5103, S5105, S5106). Then, when the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, it is allowed that the distribution destination is determined in the storage flow path 65e4. Although not shown, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a specific winning opening state 223p and a storage number counter 223r added to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to the opening state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). , The closed state is set when a closing command based on the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning. , It is determined whether the command is based on the over prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example, will be described. FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 131 (a), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven in response to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. The display contents displayed on the three symbol display devices 81 are variable.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed in the part.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved to the lower right and lower left. The image of the star is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the image of the star moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1. The image of the star moved to the lower right and the lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 are driven in response to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. Is displayed as a unit, and the effect of moving the star image in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is displayed. As a result, in addition to driving the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 up and down, it is possible to display an effect according to the drive, so that the player's interest can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. ..

The liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down described above. , The same image data is used, and the rotation angle and position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed in the part.

The image of the star displayed in the central portion is displayed by being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 described above are driven up and down. As a result, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star moved to the upper left and the lower left is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved to the upper right and the lower right. The image of the star is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

The image of the star that is moved and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is counterclockwise (as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. It is displayed rotated 90 degrees (counterclockwise). In addition, the display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, whereas when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, the display area is vertically long. It changes from the display area to the horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position of each star symbol is corrected so that the amount of movement in the vertical direction is small and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction is large. As a result, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and display position of the image of each star are corrected and moved to the upper left and the lower left. The image of the star to be displayed is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the image of the star moved to the upper right and the lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right, and the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. In the case of the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the same image data is used, and the rotation angle and the display position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

In this control example, the display position of the image data is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) so as to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be compressed (reduced) so as to be horizontally long.

If either (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Or the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, the effect can be preferably displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a game method suggestion effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content of the game method suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decorative surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated to imitate an apple, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 is decorated with the left half thereof. The lower right half of the decorative surface 523b2 is decorated. Therefore, by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to adjacent positions, it is possible to perform an integrated effect.

Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged in a circumferential shape on the round fruit portion of the apple on the decorative surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is arranged at the uppermost position of the right half, and each direction notification LED 295 is arranged clockwise from there (in the order of direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c ... 295j). The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the uppermost position of the left half.

These direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are lit and controlled by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command according to the current game state by the game method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

When a right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a right-handed gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is first turned on and off, and then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on and off. In this way, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in the clockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circumferential shape are turned on and off clockwise (clockwise), suggesting to the player that the player is currently in a game state of hitting right (right). Can be notified).

On the other hand, when a left-handed notification command indicating that the current game state is a left-handed gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off. , And so on, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in the counterclockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circumferential shape are turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting to the player that the player is currently in a game state of hitting left. Can be (notified).

FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic view showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132 (a). Also in this case, when the right-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off clockwise (clockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a. When the left-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is a gaming state in which right-handed (or left-handed) is performed by executing the same control process. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) is partially changed, and is the same in other points. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main control device 110.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

Then, in the processing of S1101, when it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this processing is completed. do.

Further, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON by the process of S1131, it becomes possible to store the game balls that have entered the storage area 65i. This storage area 65i is an area in which over-winning game balls flow down, and the content of the ending effect is configured to differ depending on the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. .. The game ball stored in the storage area 65i is flowed down to the storage / discharge flow path 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to off at the end of the jackpot (before the start of the ending effect).

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1103). In the process of S1103, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to off (S1132), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), and the game is executed. This process ends.

By the process of S1132, the over-winning solenoid 65b1 is set to off, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 can flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1. Although the details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass through the detection switches 65a1 in the same round, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and the balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot normally flow down to the winning flow path 65e1, and flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the processing of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to on (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to off (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), this process is terminated.

By the processing of S1134, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1 and is over. It is in a state where it can flow down to the winning flow path 65e2. The game ball that has flowed down into the over winning flow path 65e2 flows down into the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

By the process of S1135, the open solenoid is set to off, so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been closed by the process of S1136. When the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of this closing command, it can be determined that the ball winning number command notified thereafter is the ball winning number command based on the over winning.

When it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1133, when it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the storage / discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that the storage / discharge timing is used. If this is the case (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to off (S1138), and this process ends.

In the process of S1137, if the timing is predetermined as the jackpot game (5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect in this control example), it is determined that the storage / discharge timing is reached. As a result, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i before the start of the ending effect can be counted by the storage / discharge switch 65a4, and the ending effect can be displayed according to the counting result.

The storage / discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, it may be counted by discharging it for each round, or it may be discharged at the timing when the ending command is received.

In the process of S1137, if it is determined that it is not the storage / discharge timing (S1137: No), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage / discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage / discharge switch 65a4 is pressed. If it is determined that has passed (S1139: Yes), a storage / discharge command is set (S1140), and this process is terminated.

Since the storage / discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1140, the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game can be counted in the voice lamp control device 113, and the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game can be counted according to the count result. The ending effect can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1108.

If it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed and the present process is ended as in the first control example.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process). (S1112), anomaly processing (S1113)) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so that the game ball that has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5. This is a process for setting.

In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the distribution motor to distribute the game ball, so this process is performed as it is. finish. Not limited to this, it is natural that the distribution motor may be always driven.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reserved winning information includes winning information that is a big hit. (S5102).

In the processing of S5102, if it is determined that the reserved winning information includes winning information that will be a big hit (S5102: Yes), it is a case that it is confirmed that the winning information will be a big hit after that. Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the reserved winning information does not have the winning information that is a big hit (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not the sign flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the sign flag 203u is on (S5103), it is not confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit after that, but the probability of a big hit is high. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the sign flag 203u is on (S5103: No), when all the reserved winning information is out (that is, when the probability of becoming a big hit after that is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process proceeds to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the game ball that has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5 (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

Specifically, if the reserved prize information includes prize information that will be a big hit, a table for big hits is used, and if the counter value is "0 to 2", the distribution destination is stored. The road 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no winning information that will be a big hit in the reserved winning information, a table for removal is used, and if the counter value is "0 to 1", the distribution destination is set to the storage flow path 65e4. In the case of "2 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

In this way, when the winning information on hold has a big hit, the distribution destination is easily determined to the storage flow path 65e4, and when there is no big hit on the winning information on hold, the distribution destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. It is configured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

When the processing of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 in the processing of S5107 (S5108).

In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 (S5108: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the distribution destination is set to the storage flow path 65e4 and the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set ( S5111), the number of stored counters 203v is added by 1 (S5112), and this process is terminated.

By driving and controlling the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (direction) is changed from the state of being in the state of being in the state of communicating with the storage flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 with the distribution destination set to the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this process.

By driving and controlling the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5112, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (direction) is changed from the state of being in the state of being in a state of communicating with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out flow path 65e4. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

In this way, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 is set based on the reserved winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter). It was configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 can be determined for the player. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, since the effect unit 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be visually recognized. As a result, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be focused on, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the effect unit 65α is provided with a visible storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be determined. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the first control example described above is changed to execute the game method notification process (see FIG. 138) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103) is changed. The difference is that the jackpot-related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 135. In the main process 2, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the game method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, in this control example, the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a is closed during the jackpot game and the storage / discharging command indicating that the game ball has passed through the storage / discharging switch 65a4 are the main control devices 110. Will be sent from. The jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example differs from the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example in that it is changed so as to perform processing when these commands are received. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003).

When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2003 (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is added by 1 (S2004), and the display round is based on the value of the round number counter 223g. Set a number command (S2005). Then, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this process is terminated.

By the process of S2031, the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of the round from the main control device 110. As a result, it can be determined that the winning number command received when the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006).

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032). In the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is used. After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2033). When it is determined that the closing command has been received in the processing of S2033 (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, from the time when the closing command is received from the main control device 110 to the time when a new round number command is received (that is, after the specified number of winning openings 65a finishes winning the specified number (10 pieces), the next specific winning is given. Until the opening of the mouth 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on the over winning.

If the closed state is set based on the elapse of a predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over prize has been won. In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured to determine whether or not the closure command has been received at the elapsed timing of the predetermined period.

In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2033: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). If it is determined that the storage / discharge command has been received in the processing of S2035 (S2035: Yes), the storage / discharge counter 233r is added by 1 (S2036), and this processing is terminated.

Since the storage / discharge commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, the value of the storage / discharge counter 233r is stored when all the storage / discharge commands have been received. This is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. That is, it is possible to display the ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i. As a result, in the jackpot game, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be noticed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011). In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is performed. finish.

In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 103). Execute and end this process.

Next, the details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect processing 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201), and if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is produced. (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

When it is determined that the school flag 223i is off in the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less) (S2231: No. ), The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, when there are more game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game) (S2231: Yes. ), The processing of S2203 to S2208 is executed in the same manner as the ending setting processing (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2209.

In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected by the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed in the same manner as the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this control example, when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect suggesting the degree of expectation that there is a winning information that will be a big hit in the hold is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage / discharge counter will be 2 or more (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i) in the jackpot game. Can be improved.

The value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is set to 2 or more, but the case is not limited to this, and a case of 3 or more may be used, and it is natural that such a limitation is not provided.

Further, only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may try to do it.

Further, it is natural that the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r.

Next, the details of the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. In the game method notification process (S1831), the current game state is a game state (so-called left-handed game state) in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side of the third symbol display device 81, and a third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) which of the game states (so-called right-handed game states) in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down on the right side of the device 81.

In the game method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is performed, so a right-handed hitting suggestion command for display is set (S5202). ).

The display right-handed suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub An image suggesting right-handedness is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5202 is completed, the right-handed suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and this process is terminated. By the right-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j. Is done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on clockwise (clockwise), which is right for the player. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state of striking. As a result, even during the production in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the game state of performing a right-handed strike. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in a right-handed gaming state is that the LED is turned on clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since there is no such thing, suggestion (notification) can be performed with the same control.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201 when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probabilistic gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the ball is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 even though the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state. Since it is the case where the game ball has passed through the provided through gate 67 (that is, when the right-handed game is being performed), the process of S5205 is performed in order to suggest (notify) that the game is in the left-handed game state. Move to.

In the process of S5205, a left-handed suggestion command for display is set (S5205). The display left-handed suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display left-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub The text "Please return to left-handed!" Is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5205 is completed, the left-handed suggestion LED command is set (S5206) to end this process. By the left-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295j to a. Is done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise) to the player. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the game is in a left-handed game state. As a result, even during the production in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the gaming state of performing left-handed striking. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in a left-handed gaming state is that the LED is turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since it does not change, suggestion (notification) can be performed with the same control.

As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio of the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 based on the reserved winning information (that is, the jackpot is subsequently achieved). It was configured differently (depending on expectations). As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 can be determined for the player. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the second control example, the effect unit 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls during the jackpot is arranged is configured to be visible. As a result, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, and the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be noticed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second control example, the effect unit 65α is visibly provided with a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be easily grasped, and a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the second control example, the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area that can be seen by the player, and the jackpot is hit according to the number of stored game balls (value of the storage / discharge counter 223r). It is configured to change the production content of the ending effect of the game. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may try to do it.

In the second control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and are arranged in the circumferential shape. The lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j are configured to indicate the gaming state. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is highlighted, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

<About the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2, which are the back sides of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, are used. I explained about the game machine that performed the production.

On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display are displayed. A mirror effect is configured so that the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the production at the same time, so that the variation of the production can be increased. It can improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and the light is reflected and becomes a mirror (mirror) when viewed from the bright side. However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and it looks like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) to be inverted and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is ready to be displayed (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. As a result, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready is not visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

Here, an effect mode of the mirror effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid and moved to close positions, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to a close position, and the proximity thereof is changed. At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted, and the upper decorative surfaces (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

A left mirror 298a is arranged behind the left side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is arranged behind the right side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are tilted so as to be positioned rearward (rear side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the upper surface side. It has a character-shaped arrangement (see FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the center side of each mirror 298 from the front side via the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

The right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and the left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, the left mirror back LED 297a is arranged on the back side of the left mirror 298a, and the right mirror back LED 297b is arranged on the back side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are each composed of a magic mirror, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 or The decoration mode can be displayed. When the left mirror rear LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is transparent and the rear side is visible (not a mirror but a transmissive member) and does not form a mirror surface, so that the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. It is configured in. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

With this configuration, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state in which the player can see it and a state in which it cannot be seen by the player, and the player can be provided with a fresh effect. Can be done.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the third control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The contents are different in that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is a scenario for inverting the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding them.

In the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide motor 431 is specified as the operation target, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, and the number of operation steps corresponds to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. 100 is specified, and the positive direction is specified as the operating direction.

Corresponding to the value "2001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "10001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

In this way, in the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 slides and displaces from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and in the close position, the reflection position (display surface facing the back side (523a1)) from the normal position. , 523a2) is inverted over 2 seconds to the position where it can be seen from the front side through the mirror 298), then maintained in the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position over 2 seconds. It reverses and slides from the near position to the separated position over 2 seconds.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mirror effect in progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed, and if it is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates that there is no such thing. This mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145). Set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144) controls the lighting / extinguishing of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297, and inverts the display contents with respect to the display control device 114. Notification of the command to make it is performed. Although not shown, it is set to off when the variation display in which the mirror effect is executed is completed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the first control example described above is changed so that the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143), and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106). The difference is that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 143. In the main process 3, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling the lighting / extinguishing of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 and inverting the display contents with respect to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for notifying.

In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is on. If it is determined in the process of S1851 that the flag 223s during the mirror effect is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect has not been executed, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). When the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 1 in the processing of S5302 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5303) in order to prevent the mirror 298 from functioning as a mirror. ), Set the mirror rear LED 297 to ON (S5304), and end this process.

In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

In the process of S5305, when the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to a close position. It is the timing when the reversing operation is completed at the close position. In this case, in order to make the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side through the mirror 298 by the reverse operation, the process of S5306 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S5306, the display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to on (S5307), the mirror back LED 297 is set to off (S5308), and this process is terminated. As a result, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is symmetrically inverted (that is, the display content is normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes brighter, so that the mirror 298 becomes brighter. Will function as a mirror.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

When the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 8000 in the processing of S5309 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the back side is inverted to the front side in the mirror effect. ..

In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5310), the mirror back LED 297 is set to on (S5311), and the display inversion correction end command is set (S5312) to end this process.

By the processing of S5310 to S5312, the display contents of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 are set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to the state in which the mirror does not function as a mirror. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

In the processing of S5313, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, so the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5314) and the mirror is mirrored. The rear LED 297 is set to off (S5315), and this process ends.

By the processing of S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not performed, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 can be turned off, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. The variation display setting process 3 (S1813) executes the processes S2301 to S2307 as in the first control example. When the process of S2307 is completed, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

In the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: Yes), it is a case where a variation pattern including the mirror effect is set. Is set to on, and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, in the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is a drive scenario that does not correspond to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

After S2308, the processes of S2308 to S2312 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display are displayed. A mirror effect is configured so that the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the production at the same time, so that the variation of the production can be increased. It can improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, light is reflected and becomes a mirror, but when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes like a window. Then, the mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and the mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). By controlling the lighting of the LED in this way, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

In addition, when functioning as a window, by providing a pattern or a pattern on the back side of the mirror 298 so as to be visible, it is possible to produce an effect integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Further, by arranging the effect LED on the back side and changing the lighting pattern of the LED, it is possible to change the pattern or pattern that becomes visible when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of the production can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) to be inverted and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is ready to be displayed (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. , The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. As a result, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready is not visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. As a result, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, and then the upper display surface is displayed. Since it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Modified example of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modified example of the mirror effect described with reference to FIG. 139 will be described. In this control example, in the case of executing a mirror effect for the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, a left rear mirror member 299a is formed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved so as to be projected (reflected) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted to a position facing parallel to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely flattened.

<About a modified example of the first control example>
Next, a modified example of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. In FIGS. 148 to 150, the order in which each symbol (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlaps with respect to the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example is different, and is special. After displaying that the symbol has won the jackpot with the third symbol, it is used in the technology (so-called probabilistic promotion production) to notify whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot using the effect display. be.

In this case, when the probabilistic promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and moved so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (upper display surface 523a1 and). The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so as to come into contact with the display surface), and the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 indicates that the "probability change promotion effect" is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the promotion effect symbol is enlarged and displayed by one. The symbol for promotion effect displayed in this case is a character symbol in which the part indicating the number is deleted, unlike the third symbol displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variable game). When the character symbol displayed in this state has the same mode (character) as the "probability variation symbol" (design with specific numbers, for example, "3" and "7") used in the normal game. , It becomes a production display indicating that the probability change jackpot was won by the "probability change promotion effect".

On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state has the same mode (character) as the symbol other than the "probability variation symbol" used in the normal game, the "probability variation promotion" is performed without notifying that the probability variation jackpot has been won. "Direction" continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually expanded by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is expanded to the state shown in FIG. 150 (b). When enlarged, a mode in which a number is shown is given to a part of the character symbols (for example, the character symbol displayed in the center) among the three character symbols displayed side by side in the vertical direction.

If the number given in this case is the number attached to the "probability variation symbol" used in normal games (for example, "3", "7"), the probability variation jackpot was won by the "probability variation promotion effect". It becomes an effect display indicating that. That is, as the character symbol used for this "probability variation promotion effect", the same character as the third symbol used in the normal game is used, and a plurality of numbers (at least, "probability variation symbol" is attached to the character symbol. It is configured to have an aspect indicating a number (a number attached other than the number and the “probability variation symbol”).

According to the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)) and the timing at which the character symbol is indicated by a number (FIG. 150 (b)). )) It is possible to notify that the probabilistic jackpot has been won at the two timings. Therefore, from the start to the end of the "probability change promotion production", the player pays close attention to the production while expecting to be promoted to the probability change jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

Further, in the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is given a mode of indicating a number, and the number attached to each character symbol is a predetermined rule (numbers are added). If this is the case, it may become an odd number, or if the number satisfies a predetermined rule (for example, "341"), it may be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to more effectively use the expansion of the display area for the production.

In addition, the timing of adding numbers to the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is shifted, and the mode of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect". You may do so.

<About the 4th control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game to the first control example described above, only the closing command indicating the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Was configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time from receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

First, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a jackpot middle flag 223t, and a timekeeping counter 223u are added, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to an open state when it is determined in the jackpot game timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) that it is the round start timing (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. The closed state is set when a closing command based on the closing of is received (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning. , It is determined whether the command is based on the over prize.

The jackpot medium flag 223t is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is being executed, and when it is off, the jackpot game is being executed. Indicates that there is no such thing. The jackpot flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, it is referred to in the jackpot timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. , Off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which some processes are changed is executed instead of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) for the first control example described above, and the ending. The difference is that the ending process 4 (S1110) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the details thereof. Explanation is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the start of the round is determined by measuring the elapsed time from receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round in the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and is the same in other points. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the start of the ending is determined by counting the elapsed time from receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of executed rounds in the voice lamp control device 113. There is. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for an ending command indicating the start of the ending in the jackpot game from the main control device 110, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, for the first control example described above, the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) in which some processes are changed is executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and the jackpot timekeeping process. (See FIG. 156) is different in that it is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154. In the main process 4, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the jackpot timekeeping process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. The details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. In the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received for the first control example, the jackpot middle flag 223t is set to on, and the specific prize is won during the jackpot game. Based on the fact that the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed is received, the elapsed time from receiving the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds command and the ending command are received. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set. Then (S2002), the jackpot medium flag is set to ON (S2071), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072).

In the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is used. After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2073).

In the process of S2073, when it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the time counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), End this process.

By the process of S2075, the time counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. As a result, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process of timing to discriminate between the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

In the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not during the jackpot game and it is not necessary to perform timekeeping, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301 when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is added by 1 (S5302) to the added value of the timekeeping counter 223u. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

Specifically, if the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is 4000, it means that 4 seconds have passed since the end of the round, so it is determined that it is the round start timing.

When it is determined in the processing of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is added by 1 (S5304), the display round number command is set (S5305), and a specific prize is won. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the ending start timing (S5307).

Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the closing command in the final round. It is determined that this is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

If the ending effect is started after a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed in the final round, the timekeeping counter 223u may wait until the predetermined period is reached.

In the process of S5307, when it is determined that the ending start timing is reached (S5307), the same ending setting process (see FIG. 105) as in the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the jackpot middle flag 223t is set to off (S5310), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly used. It is configured to transmit from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time from receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158, a modified example of the opening / closing display effect in the first control example will be described.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Will be done. The decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding up and down with each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The fish school effect (the effect that the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured so that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a variable display of the school of fish according to the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid left and right (slides outward in the left-right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Will be done. The decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward from each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The fish school effect (the effect that the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured so that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a variable display of the school of fish according to the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

When the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates in the state shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the rotation coordinates and the display coordinates of the display data of the same school of fish effect are corrected and set, so that they are displayed respectively. It is configured to be. As a result, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the amount of data can be suppressed.

The present invention may be applied to each of the above control examples or a pachinko machine of a type different from each control example. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned control example, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<About the concept of the invention, for example, a slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine including a one-side member, a other-side member arranged to face the one-side member, and a slide member whose one-side and other-side members are guided by the one-side member and the other-side member to be slid-displaced. The slide member is located between a one-sided guided member guided by the one-sided member, another guided member guided by the other-side member, and one-sided guided portion and the other-side guided portion. A rotating member that is rotatably supported by the pachinko machine, and the permissible state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the permissible state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. A game machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member whose one side and the other side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has the slide member of one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. We devised a configuration formed from a rotating member rotatably supported between them (not known at the time of filing the present application). According to such a configuration, the rotating member can be rotated as well as the slide displacement, so that the variation of the effect operation can be increased. Further, by rotating the rotating member, for example, not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side can be visually recognized by the player.

However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member due to the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. .. That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the permissible state of the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is different from the permissible state of the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When an inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and the slide member is the one-side member and the other-side member. It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is increased by the amount of the gap. A possible form, a form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or these are combined. For example, the case.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a rotation driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-side guided member, which is more easily tolerated.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-sided guided member in a form in which the relative displacement is easily allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be applied to the slide member on the one-side member or the other-side member. When the pressing force (braking force) is used, the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member, which is opposite to the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-sided guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, so that the one-side member On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced by a locus farther from the other-side guided member. As a result, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means can be more easily used. Therefore, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the slide members are arranged so as to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid and displaced in the directions close to each other, one of the slide members. The side guided member is arranged to face the other side guided member of the other slide member, and the other side guided member of one slide member is arranged to face the other side guided member of the other slide member. Characterized game machine A4.

Here, when a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement and slide-displaced in a direction close to each other so as to face each other at the central position, there is no gap between the two members at the central position. When they come into contact with each other, the load on the driving means (motor) for sliding-displace the slide members becomes large, which causes damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism (gear, etc.).

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at the position where both are stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, or control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between the two at the central position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player through the gap, which causes deterioration of the appearance (effect).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, since the pair of slide members are arranged to face each other in different directions, they are slid and displaced in the directions close to each other and are centered. When the slide members come into contact with each other at the position, one side guided member of one and the other slide member retracts to accept the other side guided member of the other (the other and one) slide member. (The pair of slide members can be tilted with respect to the direction of slide displacement based on the difference in the allowable states of relative displacement described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members come into contact with each other at the central position, damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the positions at which the two slide members are stopped can be set to closer positions. As a result, at the central position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (effect) can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one-side member and the other-side member are arranged, a sensor device arranged on the base member, and a member to be detected detected by the sensor device. The gaming machine A5, wherein the detected member is arranged on the other side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member is less tolerable than the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the member to be detected is arranged, even if the posture of the slide member changes, the displacement of the member to be detected with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member with respect to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged to face each other is used as an example>
A gaming machine including a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and an inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

Here, a gaming machine including a member formed so as to be displaceable is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

In this case, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is arranged on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing the present application), the displacement of the displacement member is started or displaced. There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base due to the inertial force accompanying the stop of. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the base member is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the base member with respect to the base due to the inertial force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. It is possible to prevent the base member from being rotated with respect to the base when the inertial force accompanying the above is applied to the base member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

The mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rotational displacement, swing displacement, slide displacement, and displacement in a combination thereof. The locus of slide displacement may be a straight line, a curved line, or a locus combining these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by being guided by one side member, the other side member arranged to face the one side member, and one side and the other side by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. The slide member includes a one-sided guided member guided by the one-side member, another guided member guided by the other-side member, and one-sided guided portion thereof. A rotating member rotatably supported between the other-side guided portions is provided, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is such that the other-side cover with respect to the other-side member. Unlike the allowable state of relative displacement of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one side guided member and the other side guided member of the slide member, and the other one side guided member and the other of the slide member. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the side guided members are arranged in opposite postures.

Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member whose one side and the other side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has the slide member of one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. If a rotating member rotatably supported between the members is provided, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to one side member is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. The configuration was devised (not known at the time of filing the application). According to such a configuration, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and as a result, the slide member becomes the one-side member. And it is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the above-mentioned one-side member and the other-side member are arranged on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). According to such a configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member can be changed according to the rotation position of the base member, so that the variation of the effect operation can be increased accordingly. ..

However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one of the slides is slid when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member. The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement in the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement in the other slide member are in alternating directions (point-symmetrical directions that give rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it was difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotating position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the pair of slide members are the one side guided member and the other side guided member of one slide member, and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are arranged in opposite postures, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, one side The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member can be in the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is the base. It is possible to suppress the rotation with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is increased by the amount of the gap. A possible form, a form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or these are combined. For example, the case.

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. In the case of sliding displacement in the direction, the rotation of the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is located substantially vertically above the other-side guided member. A game machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. , When the slide member is slid and displaced in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side guided member is located substantially vertically above the other side guided member. Since the rotation position is set, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (one side of the slide member). The displacement component (displacement component) that exerts a force (braking force) that presses against the member or the other side member can be set downward in the vertical direction (direction of gravity). As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. In the case of sliding displacement in the direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is located substantially vertically below the other-side guided member. A game machine B4 characterized in that a rotation position is set.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. , When the slide member is slid and displaced in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side guided member is located substantially vertically below the other side guided member. Since the rotation position of the slide member is set, when an inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, the displacement component (slide member) in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The displacement component (displacement component) that exerts a force (braking force) that presses against one side member or the other side member can be set upward in the vertical direction (direction opposite to the direction of gravity). As a result, when the slide member is slid and displaced, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the sliding portion due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B3 includes a rotation driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-side guided member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the rotation driving means is arranged on one side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is more easily allowed as compared with the other side guided member, so that the slide When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means is used to increase the pressing force. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the rotating driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member is provided, and the rotational driving means is arranged on the other side guided member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be set upward in the vertical direction (direction opposite to the gravity direction). Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the other side guided member whose relative displacement is less tolerable than that of the guide member, the direction is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. It is possible to prevent the displacement component of the above from becoming too large. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be suppressed from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide is slid. Wear of the sliding part due to displacement can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member, which is opposite to the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-sided guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, so that the one-side member On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced by a locus farther from the other-side guided member. As a result, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means can be more easily used. Therefore, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member, which is opposite to the other side member.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member which is opposite to the other side member, so that the one side member and the other side When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are respectively displaced relative to the member, the rotation driving means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be suppressed from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide is slid. Wear of the sliding part due to displacement can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide member 4520 whose position of the rotating shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a game machine provided with a slide member formed so as to be slidable between the first position and the second position, the slide member is arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position. The slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine C1 characterized by this.

Here, a gaming machine including a slide member formed so as to be slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application includes an opposing member arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position, and an effect means for producing an effect between the opposing member and the sliding member. A game machine was devised (not known at the time of filing the application). However, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the sliding member arranged at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the effect by the effect means cannot be sufficiently performed (for example, the movable member for the effect). Space cannot be secured, or the area for visually recognizing the members for production cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side and is positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. The visible area of the member (for example, the liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, which leads to an increase in the size of the device as a whole.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of slide displacement. The interval between can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the opposite member is large, the effect by the effect means can be sufficiently performed, while the slide member is moved to the rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the opposite member is small. By rotating the slide member, the amount of protrusion of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the entire device can be miniaturized.

As the effect means, for example, a displaceable member is displaced by using the space between the facing members and the sliding members, and the facing member is a space between the facing members and the sliding members. Examples include those that are displaced by using, those that allow the display and decoration on the back side to be visually recognized from between the facing members and the sliding members, those that irradiate light between the facing members and the sliding members, and those that combine these. NS.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect means includes an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the facing space between the facing member and the slide member.

Here, for example, in a configuration in which the facing member irradiates light toward the space facing the slide member, the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the slide member from the space facing the slide member and the facing member. It can be carried out.

In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the sliding member arranged at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side and is positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. The visible area of the member (for example, the liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, which leads to an increase in the size of the device as a whole.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement, so that the slide member is formed at the rotation position. Depending on the situation, the distance between the facing members and the facing members can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the facing member becomes large, the light emitted from the irradiation means can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, while the slide member faces the facing member. By rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the interval becomes smaller, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position side can be reduced, and a visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the entire device can be miniaturized.

The irradiation means is arranged in a mode in which the slide member is arranged on the opposing member so as to be able to irradiate the slide member, a mode in which the sliding member is arranged on the slide member so as to be able to irradiate the facing member, and between the slide member and the facing member. Examples thereof include a mode in which irradiation is possible and arranged on the back side between the facing surfaces, and a mode in which these are combined.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 or C2 includes a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member is arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for the rotation of the base member with respect to the base while maintaining the slide member in the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a pair of the slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members are arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. As a result, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be made effective.

In the gaming machines C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is a rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member causes the position of the center of gravity to be changed to the base. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is kept away from the center of rotation of the base member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member causes the rotation. Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is changed by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the base member is brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the slide member By rotating, the position of the center of gravity is brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, so that the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening 5641 is formed as an example is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member includes an opening formed on a side surface thereof, and the object is a part thereof. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to pass through a state in which a slingshot is projected outward from the opening.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be flowed in from one end side, passed on the back side of the game area, and then discharged from the other end side to the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member displaceably arranged on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount of the passage member protruding.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed on the side surface thereof, and is formed so that the object can pass through with a part of the opening protruding outward from the opening. Therefore, as compared with the case where the entire object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be secured accordingly.

The cross-sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular cross-section, an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that a pair of the openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a pair of openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member, so that the facing distance between the side surfaces where the pair of openings are formed is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently secure the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, an inclined surface is formed on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening in the passage member, so that the object is one of the inclined surfaces. The amount of protrusion that allows the portion to protrude from the opening to the outside is expanded to suppress the protrusion of the passage member, and the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral edge of the opening is secured to improve the rigidity of the passage member. be able to.

In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is set to a dimension at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Since it is set to, when the object projects a part of the object from the opening to the outside, it is possible to suppress that the object is received only by the tip (inner peripheral side end) of the inclined surface. That is, since the ball can be received at the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, damage to the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed with a rectangular cross section from the four wall portions, and the opening is formed on at least one of the four wall portions. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed from the four wall portions in a rectangular cross section, and is formed on at least one of the four wall portions. Since the opening is formed, the cross-sectional coefficient of the passage member can be secured and the rigidity thereof can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed into a circular cross-sectional shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular cross-sectional shape is a line segment connecting two points on the curve. The gaming machine D6, characterized in that the opening is formed by cutting with a machine.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-sectional shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and is on a curve in the circular cross-section. Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, in the passage member, the passage path of the object is curved or bent, and the opening is the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object by the bending or bending of the passage path. The gaming machine D7, which is formed on the side surface of the passage member on the opposite side to the above.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the position where the opening is formed is opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the bending or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side surface of the opening, that is, on the side surface opposite to the side surface on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, it is possible to prevent the peripheral edge of the opening from being worn or damaged.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member includes at least a displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member follows a displacement locus of a part of an object protruding from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable to at least a range including it, it is possible to effectively utilize the region where the overhang of the passage member is reduced and expand the displacement region of the displacement member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

The displacement member may be formed so as to be partially displaceable from the opening of the passage member to the position where the displacement member is inserted into the inside of the passage member. In this case, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and it is possible to give power by bringing it closer to the player.

The gaming machine D8 includes a detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least the region where the opening is formed in the passage member, and when the detecting means detects the object, the displacement member The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is restricted from being displaced to at least a range including the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in at least the region where the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member is at least a displacement locus (passage member). Since it is restricted to be displaced to at least a range including (displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening), it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

In the gaming machine D9, the detection means is provided upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and includes a first switch and a second switch for detecting the passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. The gaming machine D10 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D9, the detecting means are arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and detect the passage of an object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, the presence or absence of an object in at least the region where the opening of the passage member is formed can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Characteristic E group> (directed by over-winning game balls)
Based on the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, a variable member that can be changed to one state that regulates the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and a second state in which the regulation is lifted, and the establishment of specific conditions. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state and the privilege game execution means, the ball enters the ball entry means. A variable that causes the variable member to be changed from the second state to the first state based on the counting means for counting the number of the game balls and the count value by the counting means having reached a predetermined upper limit value. The effect executing means for executing the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means and the effect executed by the effect executing means are determined before the means and the variable means change the ball to the second state. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect determining means is configured to be capable of determining a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a start-in ball, the winning state may be entered. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state is reached, a large opening provided on the board surface is set to the open state. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is in a winning state, which is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a specified number or more of winning balls are detected in the open state of 1 for the large opening. By doing so, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the players.

However, with such a conventional gaming machine, even if the over-winning effect is executed, the player is only made aware that he / she has won a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is fully appreciated. In some cases, it could not be improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball, one state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted to the entry means, and the second state in which the regulation is released can be changed. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of the variable member and the specific condition, and the privilege game execution means. When this is done, the variable member is subjected to the counting means for counting the number of game balls entered into the ball entering means and the variable member based on the fact that the count value by the counting means has reached a predetermined upper limit value. An effect of executing an effect based on a variable means for changing from the second state to the first state and a game ball entering the ball entering means before the variable means is changed to the second state. It has an execution means and an effect determining means for determining an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, and the effect determining means can determine a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. It is configured in.

This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition in the game machine E1, the acquisition means for acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the storage means for storing the information are stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. It has a discriminating means for discriminating information and a specific condition satisfying means for satisfying the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means by the discriminating means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is set as at least one condition that the information to be determined as a specific determination result is stored.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination condition. It has a discriminating means for discriminating information and a specific condition satisfying means for satisfying the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, and the special condition is the discriminating in the storage means. It is set as at least one condition that the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by the means is stored.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means by executing the effect of the special effect mode. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect of the special effect mode is executed, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the special condition has a predetermined probability when the storage means stores the information determined to be a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means. Therefore, even if the effect of the special effect mode is not executed in the privilege game, there is a possibility that information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the effect of the special effect mode is not executed, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the information that becomes a specific determination result is stored. It has the effect of maintaining motivation.

A gaming machine E4, wherein in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes an effect using a game ball after being counted by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect using the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means. , There is an effect that the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for executing the effect is provided separately from the game ball.

In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes a mode in which the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific region configured to be visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode guides the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Since it includes, it is possible to focus on a specific area and play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Production can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the game machines E1 to E6, the game machine E7 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, there is a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode. Because there is, it is possible to realize a visual effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A mode of the end effect executing means for executing the end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E7 and the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. The gaming machine E8, which comprises means for determining the end effect mode for determining.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the end effect execution means for executing the end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the end effect mode determination for determining the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. Since it has means and means, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the end of the privileged game.

<Characteristic F group> (The accessory is formed by reversing the sub liquid crystal)
An effect executing means that executes an effect based on the discrimination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area. As one of the above, the display mode is displayed as one of the first display means having the first specific notification unit for notifying the player of the specific notification mode and the effect executed by the effect executing means. A second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area. At least the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. A gaming machine F1 having one display means and a displacement means capable of displace the second display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like in the configuration, and can execute various effects by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional gaming machines employ a technique for ensuring the visibility of the display effect even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the execution of the display effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134891).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, it may not be possible to realize an appropriate effect operation using the display effect. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of production.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the first display area in which the display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. And the first display means having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution means. As one of the above-mentioned effects, a second display having a second display area on which the display mode is displayed and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area. The means, the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are provided to the player, respectively. The second display means that can be visually recognized includes at least the first display means and the displacement means that can displace the second display means.

Thereby, a plurality of effects having different modes can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

In the second state of the gaming machine F1, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. The featured gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is combined with the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is composed of a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit displays a part of the specific design. Is displayed, among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed by the first specific notification unit, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The gaming machine F3, characterized in that the specific symbol is formed by combining them.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific notification mode is composed of a specific symbol, a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit displays a part of the specific symbol. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed by the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific symbol is formed.

As a result, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed by using the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, so that there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first display means and the second display means have a different third display means, and the effect executing means has the effect in the third display area of the third display means. As one of the above, a predetermined display mode is displayed. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are close to each other in parallel with the third display area, or at least a part thereof overlaps with each other. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first display means and the second display means have a different third display means, and the effect executing means is predetermined as one of the effects in the third display area of the third display means. The display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged in parallel or at least partially overlapped with each other in close proximity to the third display area. Therefore, there is an effect that a more flexible production can be realized.

When the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the effect executing means includes the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is easy to execute the specific notification mode when executing the effect of.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect executing means includes the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to carry out the specific notification mode.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific notification mode will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

An effect determining means for determining an effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the determination means for executing the determination and the determination result of the determination means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5 based on the establishment of the determination condition. The gaming machine F6, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and an effect determining means for determining the effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

As a result, there is an effect that various production modes can be realized according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

<Feature G group> (Display by moving the design of the main liquid crystal while moving the sub liquid crystal)
At least the second display means at a position where the display area of the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the second display means overlap with the display area of the first display means. A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means and the second display means for displaying and controlling the first movable means, the first display means, and the second display means, respectively. In the state, when the first movable means is moved on the display area of the first display means, the first display area after being moved with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by the movement. It is characterized by having a display mode setting means for setting a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means in the display control means. Game machine G1 to play.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display in a plurality of configurations. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying a main effect related to the game and a sub display device for displaying an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom in display production.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means. A first movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping the above, a display control means for displaying and controlling the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means. Display of the first display means exposed by moving when a predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display area of the first display means by the first movable means. Display mode setting in which the display control means is set to a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display means after being moved with respect to the region. Means and.

This has the effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means.

In the gaming machine G1, the display areas of the third display means and the third display means, which are different from the first display means and the second display means, overlap with the first display area, and the second display means and one end of each overlap with the first display area. The display control means has a second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means at the same position, and the second display means and the third display means are each said. When it is moved to the same position, it is characterized in that it displays a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display area with one end as a boundary based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Game machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the display area of the third display means overlap with the first display area, and one end of each is the same as the second display means. The display control means includes, at least, a second movable means capable of moving the third display means to a position to be a position, and the display control means is such that the second display means and the third display means are each described above. When the symbols are moved to the same position, a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display areas with one end as a boundary is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

As a result, the symbol 1 can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, so that there is an effect that a display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means has the second display means and the third display means in a state where the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that when at least one of the display means is movable in a direction away from the display means, the specific movable display mode is set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means in the second display means and the third display means. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in a direction in which the second display means and the third display means are separated from each other, the specific movable display mode is set. There is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each of the three display means.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the symbol 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the second display means, the first display means and the above. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is set to be displayed by the third display means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the above. Since the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means are set to be displayed respectively, the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means can be used more freely. There is an effect that a high degree of display content can be realized.

<Feature H group> (Right-handed notification on rotating display device)
An entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means. Specific to the discrimination execution means that executes the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means. When the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, the firing intensity of the game ball is based on the operation of the player in the game machine having the variable ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. The first flow path in which the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can flow down by the launching means capable of variably firing and the launching means is different from the first firing intensity. After the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity flows down and the identification information based on the specific discriminant result is displayed with the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged, the second flow The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a suggesting means for causing the display means to display a suggesting mode suggesting that the gaming ball is launched on the road.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like in the configuration, and can execute various effects by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of such conventional gaming machines can display a suggestion display image suggesting the direction in which the gaming ball is launched to the display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the display of the suggestion display image (for example,). JP-A-2015-134891).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device is variable. Therefore, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a risk that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be appropriately notified.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. Based on the storage means for storing the information acquired in the above, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Those having a display means for displaying identification information and a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player and a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity by the launching means can flow down. A possible first flow path, a second flow path in which a gaming ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity flows down and the variable entry means is arranged, and a specific said After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path.

As a result, the player who has confirmed the suggested mode can launch the game ball with the second firing intensity, so that even a beginner of the game can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means. You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine whose gaming method is easier to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine H1, the suggestion mode includes a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of a rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. The gaming machine H2 having at least a part of a ring shape and including a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, and the suggested mode is a ring. It has at least a part of the shape and includes a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

As a result, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggestion mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

In the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is characterized in that the gaming ball rotates in the direction of flying to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating the gaming ball in the direction of flying to the second flow path, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that the gaming ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that the game ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode. There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the aspect can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that the symbol is displayed to the player. There is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched can be intuitively understood from the impression of.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the back surface side of the display means is inverted so as to be located on the player side, and the back surface side of the display means is a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path. The gaming machine H6, characterized in that the above is arranged.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it has a reversing means for reversing so that the back surface side of the display means is located on the player side, and a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged on the back surface side of the display means. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can accurately understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to be lit in order toward the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is the second stream. Since the lighting is controlled in order toward the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Feature I group> (The sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the effect execution means and the display means are specific to cause the display means to display the effect mode accompanying the identification information based on the determination result. When the identification information is displayed based on the determination result, the privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the display means in the possessing gaming machine are the main display means and the first display means thereof. The sub-display means is composed of at least a first position parallel to the display area and a sub-display means movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. When the movable means that can be moved to the second position and the sub-display means are moved to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and the sub-display means is displayed. When the sub-display means is moved to the second position and a specific condition is satisfied, the sub-display means is identified by switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which information is displayed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display in a plurality of configurations. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying a main effect related to the game and a sub display device for displaying an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. I am trying to. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, the sub display device can be moved to the front side of the main display device, and the main display device and the sub display device can perform a complex display effect (for example). , JP-A-2015-029606).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom in display production.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification on the display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the display means displays an effect mode associated with the identification information based on the discrimination result. It has an effect executing means to be executed, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result, and the display. The means is at least a main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and at least a sub-display means movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. A movable means that is configured and capable of moving the sub-display means to the first position and the second position, and a main display when the sub-display means is moved to the first position. The identification information is displayed on the means, the sub-display means is set by switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub-display means, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and specific conditions are set. If it is established, the sub-display means has a switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed.

As a result, the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub-display means, so that there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine I1, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that, at one position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to face each other with the main display means in between.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means, and the first display means. In terms of position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to face each other with the main display means in between.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed for the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other on one end side, so that the display area of the main display means is hard to see. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other on one end side to display the main display means. Since the area is hard to see, it is possible to realize a compact display using only the sub display means at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means, respectively.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first display means and the second display means each have a rotating means for rotating around the main display means, so that the sub There is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the display means.

In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means so that the first display means and the second display means move in the vertical direction of the main display means. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is variable to a vertical position where it is located and a left-right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means in the vertical direction of the main display means. It is variable to a vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located, and a left-right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the sub display means.

When the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position in the gaming machine I5 and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means The first fusion display mode in which the first display means is fused and displayed, and the sub when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position and then moved to the left and right positions. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode that is fused and displayed by the display means and the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. The first fusion display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed, and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed when the sub display means is later moved to the left and right positions, the fusion display mode setting means is provided. There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether the position is present or left and right.

<Characteristic J group> (Display mode of the inverted sub liquid crystal is displayed by a mirror)
When a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and an effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means are displayed, and an effect mode based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means and the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the display means is composed of at least a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the first display means. The two display means are rotated to the front position where the display area faces the front side and the second position where the display area faces the back side, respectively, and the first display means is rotated to the back position. When the first projection means and the second display means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side are rotated to the back position, they are displayed on the second display means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a second projection means for projecting the effect mode toward the front side.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined hobby effect is selected, the projection device is made visible, and the player's face or the like is projected onto the projection device to realize an impactful hobby effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-329159).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the projection device is merely set to be visible to the player, the target projected on the projection device is limited. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player by using the projection device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means are specified. When the effect mode based on the determination result is displayed, the display means includes a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the display means is a first display means and a second display means. A rotating means that can rotate the first display means and the second display means to a front position in which the display area faces the front side and a second position in which the display area faces the back side, respectively. The first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position, and the second display means for the back position. It has a second projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the front side when rotated to the front side.

As a result, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can visually recognize the effect modes displayed on the respective display means. That is, it is possible to realize a novel effect operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the effect mode is visible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have a mirror surface portion capable of reflecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. The gaming machine J2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since it has a mirror surface portion that can be used, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can clearly see the effect mode displayed on each of them through the mirror surface portion. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are rotated to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine, respectively, as the back position. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has a V-shape on the front side of the gaming machine so that the first display means and the second display means are respectively rearward positions. Since it is rotated to a position, the appearance can be significantly different from the front position by being in the back position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are the first when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back positions, respectively. The gaming machine J4 having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means include the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the back position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

In the gaming machine J1, the effect mode is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the first display means is diffracted by the first projection means. The effect mode is arranged at a position facing the second display region of the second display means rotated to the first diffraction means and the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the second display means is diffracted to the second projection means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by having a second diffraction means for causing the rotation.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first diffraction means which is arranged at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. A second diffracting means that is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. And have.

Thereby, the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be freely determined within a range that can be diffracted by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be increased.

The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are half mirrors in the gaming machine J5.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are composed of a half mirror, the display area of the first display means and the second It is possible to change whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

In the gaming machine J5 or J6, when at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position, the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are rotated to the back position, respectively. The gaming machine J7 is characterized by having a display means or a movable means that can be moved to a position facing the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first displaying means and the second displaying means is said to be the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Since it has the first display means or the movable means that can be moved to a position facing the second display means when it is rotated to the back position, the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Has the effect of being able to diffract more accurately.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning using the closure command)
The main control means that executes the control of the game, the secondary control means that executes the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state in which the game ball can enter, and the entry of the game ball are regulated. The main control means has a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a regulated state, and the main control means executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and an effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. An entry signal is output based on the entry of the game ball into the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the establishment signal output means for outputting the establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable entry means. The slave control means determines the effect information, and has a ball entry signal output means for the player and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. After receiving the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode based on the effect information determined by the means, the effect execution means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and the establishment signal, a predetermined value is provided. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until the condition is satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a start-in ball, the winning state may be entered. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state is reached, a large opening provided on the board surface is set to the open state. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is in a winning state, which is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a specified number or more of winning balls are detected in the open state of 1 for the large opening. By doing so, some players are trying to improve their interests (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-112239).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won a prize in the large opening opening in order to determine whether or not to execute the over-winning effect. In general, the number of balls entered until the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, it is necessary to reset the conditions for whether or not to execute the over-winning effect according to the model, and it may not be possible to transfer the program adopted for one model to another game machine as it is. rice field. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening that the gaming ball can enter. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state and a regulated state in which the entry of a game ball is restricted, and the main control means is a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination means thereof. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means and the discriminating result by the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the variable ball entering means is described. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that changes from a regulated state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable ball entry means. An entry signal output means for outputting a ball entry signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means. The subordinate control means is determined by the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode and the effect mode determining means based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. An effect executing means for executing the said effect mode, and a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period from receiving the establishment signal until the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Have.

As a result, the slave control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is simply received from the main control means, so that the slave control means directly determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine. Therefore, since it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the slave control means, there is an effect that the workload of the developer can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined predetermined period elapses. ..

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined predetermined period elapses. Therefore, due to the execution of the specific effect, after a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the variable ball-entry means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player is further variable-entry. It is possible to make the means recognize that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be pleased.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the slave control means receives the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined predetermined period as the predetermined condition, the specific effect The gaming machine K3 is provided with an evasive means for avoiding the execution of the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined predetermined period as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal is received is provided, the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number is exceeded for the player due to the execution of the specific effect. Can notify that the ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be more pleased.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination condition is satisfied with the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means and the information acquired by the acquisition means. A prior signal indicating prior information based on the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means and the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means before the storage means to be stored and the discrimination condition are satisfied. The sub-control means has a pre-information storage means for storing the pre-information indicated by the pre-signal, and the specific effect mode is , The gaming machine K4, which indicates the content of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means stores at least the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition and the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is satisfied. The storage means, the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discriminating condition is satisfied, and the pre-signal indicating the pre-discrimination result based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means are used. The subordinate control means has a pre-information storage means for storing the pre-information indicated by the pre-signal, and the specific effect mode includes a pre-signal output means for outputting to the control means. It shows the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

As a result, in order to confirm the contents of the prior information, the game ball is positively given to the player during the execution of the privilege game in an attempt to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine K1 characterized in that, in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 First prize opening (ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on the starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state is reached, a large opening provided on the board surface is set to the open state. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is in a winning state, which is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a specified number or more of winning balls are detected in the open state of 1 for the large opening. by, Ru Monogaa that aim to interest the improvement of the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-11239

Such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the workload of a developer.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for executing game control, a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a game. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a regulated state in which the entry of a game ball is restricted , and the main control means determines discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition. The discriminating means that can be executed, the effect information determining means for determining the effect information for executing the effect for showing the discriminant result by the discriminating means, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means are counted. A predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means from the restricted state to the open state based on the counting means capable of performing the determination and the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The variable ball-entry means is changed from the regulated state to the open state after a predetermined interval period elapses, and the regulated condition is satisfied until the regulated condition that can be satisfied when counted by the counting means is satisfied. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game capable of varying up to, an establishment signal output means capable of outputting an establishment signal to the slave control means based on the establishment of the regulation condition, and the above-mentioned Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, the ball entry signal output means capable of outputting the ball entry signal to the slave control means and the game ball enter the variable ball entry means. It has a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball, and the slave control means is based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. , The effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode, the effect execution means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and the period information corresponding to the elapsed period after receiving the establishment signal. The period determination means that can be used and the regulation information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the regulation state when the establishment signal is received are set, and the interval period elapses by the period determination means. The information setting means capable of setting the release information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the open state based on the determination of the period information corresponding to the above, and the ball entry signal are received. In this case, the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the determination that the regulation information is set, and the fact that the interval period has elapsed since the establishment signal was received. discrimination Said variable ball entrance means based on that the one in which has an open presentation execution means, capable of performing the opening effect to indicate that it is in the open state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a main control means for executing game control, a secondary control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a game ball can enter. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state and a regulated state in which the entry of a game ball is restricted , and the main control means can execute discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition. It is possible to count the game balls that have entered the variable ball-entry means, the effect information determining means that determines the effect information for executing the effect for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the variable ball-entry means. Based on the counting means and the discriminating result by the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the counting means is informed that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entering means from the restricted state to the open state. It is possible to change the variable ball until the regulation condition that can be satisfied when the count is satisfied is satisfied, and after the predetermined interval period elapses, the variable ball entry means is changed from the regulation state to the open state until the regulation condition is satisfied. To the privilege game execution means capable of executing the possible privilege game, the establishment signal output means capable of outputting the establishment signal to the slave control means based on the establishment of the regulation condition, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the entry signal output means capable of outputting the entry signal to the slave control means based on the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means. The subordinate control means determines the effect mode based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. It is possible to discriminate between the effect mode determining means, the effect executing means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and the period information corresponding to the elapsed period from receiving the establishment signal. The period determination means and the regulation information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the regulation state when the establishment signal is received are set, and the period determination means corresponds to the elapse of the interval period. Information setting means capable of setting open information that can identify that the variable ball entry means is in the open state based on the information being determined, and when the ball entry signal is received, the said Based on the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the determination that the regulation information is set, and the determination that the interval period has elapsed since the establishment signal was received. hand And has a open directing execution means, capable of performing the opening effect to indicate that the variable ball entrance means is in the open state.

This has the effect of reducing the workload of the developer.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. It is a front view of a rear case and a base member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member in line XXb-XXb of FIG. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a rear case and a slide unit. It is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a close position. It is a front view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a close position. It is a front perspective view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is a front view of the slide unit in a state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a front view of the slide member, and (b) is a rear view of the slide member. (A) is a reference view, and (b) is a front schematic view schematically showing a slide mechanism. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal display device is arranged at a close position. Is a schematic front view schematically showing. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a reference figure. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the liquid crystal surface is directed to the front side, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state where the decorative surface is directed to the front side. It is a schematic front view illustrated. (A) and (b) are frontal schematic views of a slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position. (A) and (b) are frontal schematic views of a slide mechanism showing a transition state when the base member is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position. (A) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56 (b). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the passage member in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram showing the control of the display area in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the effect in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the reversing operation of the slide member in the first control example. (A) and (b) are views which show the decorative surface of the slide member in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display contents in the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display control in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the over-winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning over-winning table, and (c) is a predictive over-winning table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the winning table schematically, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the out-of-order over winning table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit ending table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the predictive ending table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content schematically, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the detached ending table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotary drive. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of a scenario schematically, and (d) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of a reversal drive scenario schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the drive data storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp editing process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal drive process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing for display which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a normal winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing correction process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the first variable winning device in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing display contents in the second control example. (A) and (b) are views which show the decorative surface of the slide member in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display device of the pachinko machine in the third control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect drive scenario in the third control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display device in the third control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a modification of the display contents of the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game timekeeping processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win a prize in the second specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), the ball is put into a special gaming state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. Can be done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. , The left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operating unit 200. In addition, in FIGS. 5 to 14, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

Here, in FIGS. 7 to 10, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position is shown, and in FIGS. 11 to 14, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position is shown. NS.

In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position with the display surface 523a facing the front, and in FIGS. 8 and 12, the display surface 523a is facing the front. The states in which the liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged at the separated positions are shown in the drawings. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position with the decorative surface 523b facing the front, and in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decorative surface 523b is facing the front. The states in which the liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged at the separated positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably housed in the internal space of the back case 300.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. ..

The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 arranged on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed so as to be slidably displaceable in a direction close to or separated from each other. The pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have a speed and displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement) of their displacement (rotation around the rotation shaft 523c and slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). ) Are set (controlled) to be the same as each other.

The base member 400 is rotatably formed between the first rotation position and the second rotation position which is substantially 90 ° out of phase with the first rotation position. At the first rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and at the second rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying a design or the like, and is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the display surface 523a is oriented toward the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11 and 12). ) And a posture in which the decorative surface 523b, which is the back side of the display surface 523a, faces the front (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13 and 14).

When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidly displaced in the directions close to each other and arranged at close positions, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol While the display device 81 is invisiblely shielded (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11 and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid-displaced in a direction in which they are separated from each other and arranged at the separated positions, By retracting the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (FIGS. 8, FIG. 10, FIG. 12 and FIGS. 14).

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23, a configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the back case 300 will be described.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400.

It should be noted that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, FIG. 19 shows the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position, and FIG. 18 shows the base member 400 in the second rotation position. The transition state when rotating from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotational drive mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and the like. A second wheel member 322 and an lining member 331-334 for holding each of the wheel members 321 and 322 are arranged.

In the rotary drive mechanism, the drive motor 311 and the pinion gear 312 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 311 and the first gear (first transmission gear 313a) are meshed with the pinion gear 312 and the last gear (first gear). The 3 transmission gears 313c) are provided with a transmission gear train meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and are arranged on the upper right side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in front view. A second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c, respectively.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members rotatably supported by a shaft 303 erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and are outer peripheral edges of the base member 400. A plurality of wheels are arranged at predetermined intervals along the above. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located at two locations below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located at two locations above the base member 400 and at two locations on the left and right sides. Each is arranged. Here, the detailed configuration of each wheel member 321 and 322 will be described with reference to FIG.

20 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 in the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 in the line XXb-XXb of FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture of projecting toward the front side, and the shaft is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301. Around the 303, a first concave portion 301b1 and a second concave portion 301b2, which are concentric with the shaft 303 and are circular in front view, are recessed in the bottom wall portion 301.

The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is , The dimension is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error in assembling the first wheel member 321 into the second recess 301b2.

The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which grooves 321a and 322a having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and are based on the grooves 321a and 322a. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. As a result, the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the back base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward in FIG. 20A) and in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 20A). can.

The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are arranged between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. As a result, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that supports the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

Further, the outer diameter of the wall portion of the second wheel member 322 located on the front side (left side of FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. Will be done. That is, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger on the wall portion on the front side than on the wall portion on the back side. As a result, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 and improve the durability while suppressing an error in the assembling direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500, which is relatively heavy, is arranged on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 that receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is tilted forward to the front side. Since the second wheel member 322 is arranged above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the wall portion on the front side of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration is particularly effective for suppressing the forward leaning posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

It will be described back from FIG. 15 to FIG. The lining members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening in the center into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. .. As a result, the lining members 331 to 334 are laid on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the respective wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming out of the shaft 303.

The base member 400 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 401 having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view is formed in the center, and is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge, and the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 and the second described above are formed. The flange portion 402 inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the last gear (third transmission) in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism, which is engraved on the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. It includes a gear portion 403 to which the gear 313c) is meshed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the positive direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. , The rotation of the gear at the end of the transmission gear train (third transmission gear 313c) is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in the front view (in the right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the positive direction, the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the gear (third transmission gear 313c) at the end of the transmission gear train is rotated. , The base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (rotation direction to the left in FIG. 19) by being transmitted to the gear portion 403, and is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17 through the state shown in FIG. NS.

In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 mainly in contact with the groove bottom in the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a are supported by rolling contact between the circumferential surfaces, the contact surface is minimized and the groove is supported with less friction. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 required for rotationally driving the base member 400 can be suppressed.

Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is arranged (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has a first rotation position and a second rotation position with respect to the back case 300. When rotated between, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated along with this rotation, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG. 19.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are front perspective views and front views of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 show a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL. It is a front perspective view and the front view of the slide unit SL in the state of being in the state. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail arranged on the front side of the cover member 420. It mainly includes 510, a slide member 520 arranged on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to cause slide displacement.

The cover member 420 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 421 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view is formed in the center. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Is arranged (fixed).

The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is arranged at a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 in the front view when arranged at a close position, and can rotate without interfering with the cover member 420.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32 and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33 and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

In addition, in FIGS. 30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position, which is the position for arranging the slide member 520 in the close position, is separated from the slide member 520 in FIGS. 34 and 35. In the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the outward reversal position, which is the position for arranging the position, in FIGS. 32 and 32, the transmission arm 437 rotates from the inward protrusion position to the outward reversal position or vice versa. The transition states at the time of being performed are illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 30 to 35, in order to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and facilitate understanding, the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

The slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for sliding-driving each of the slide members 520. Since they are configured to be the same, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one of them will be described, and the other will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 arranged on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. The transmission gear 433 to be meshed and the rack gear 434a to which the transmission gear 433 is meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral side and the rack member 434 is formed in a curved plate shape, and the inner peripheral side of the rack member 434. The base end side is fixed to the transmission gear 435 meshed with the rack gear 434b engraved in the above, the pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and the pair of arm drive gears 436. A pair of transmission arms 437 and a pair of transmission arms 437 are mainly provided.

Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the inward protruding position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 (the position at which the tip end side thereof faces the opening 421 side of the cover member 420). When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated to perform the pair of transmissions. The arm 437 is rotated around its base end side in opposite directions.

When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the positive direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 go through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and then move to the outward reversal position (approximately 180 from the inward reversal position) shown in FIGS. 34 and 35. It is rotated by ° and is arranged at a position where the tip end side thereof faces the side opposite to the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

On the other hand, from the state where the transmission arm 437 is arranged at the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the opposite direction, and the rotation is transmitted via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. When transmitted to the rack gear 434a of the above, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are rotated to perform the pair of transmissions. The arm 437 is rotated around its base end side in opposite directions. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the opposite direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inward reversal positions shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

As will be described later, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably connected to the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated around the base end side. The inner surface of the sliding groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the tip end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slidably displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

In this case, in the configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted into the slide displacement of the slide member 520 by using the linear rack member extending along the slide direction of the slide member 520, the slide member 520 When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the back case 300 (outer wall portion 302). Therefore, the base member 400 is moved to the back case 300. On the other hand, it cannot be rotated.

When the linear rack member is housed in the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to allow the base member 400 to rotate with respect to the back case 300, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 becomes short. Not only that, the linear rack member is visibly exposed from the opening 421 to the player, and the appearance is impaired.

On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable, but in this case, since the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps with the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide The amount of slide displacement of the member 520 is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is arranged along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side (outside of the opening 421) of the cover member 420, and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is rotated by the rack member 434. The displacement of the slide member 520 is converted to the rotation of the arm drive gear 436 to rotate the transmission arm 437. Therefore, the base member 400 is attached to the rear case 300 while ensuring the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520. The rack member 434 can be prevented from being exposed from the opening 421, and the appearance can be improved. Further, since the drive motor 431 can be arranged on the outside (both sides) of the slide displacement locus of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point as well.

It will be described back from FIG. 24 to FIG. 29. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and when the slide rail 510 is expanded and contracted, the slide member 520 is moved with respect to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair of supporting both ends of the slide member 520 as a set, and the two sets are in a posture in which the expansion / contraction directions are different from each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). They are placed facing each other.

Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. Note that in FIGS. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is shown for ease of understanding.

In the present embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 and slide members 520 are arranged. In these two sets, the distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set and the pair of slides in the other set are set. Since the rails are configured to be substantially the same except that they are smaller than the opposite distance between the rails 510, both are designated by the same reference numerals, only one of them will be described, and the other will be omitted. By providing a difference in the above-mentioned facing intervals, one set of slide rails 510 can be arranged between the opposite sets of slide rails 510.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to the base end rail 511 arranged on the front surface of the cover member 420 so as to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base end rail 511. The intermediate rail 512 is provided, and the tip rail 513 is connected so as to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the intermediate rail 512. That is, the base end rail 511 and the tip end rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

The slide member 520 includes one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the tip rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are arranged on the back side, respectively, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 521. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524. The facing member 525 is provided so as to face each other.

The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a on which the tip rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is arranged and a liquid crystal-side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523, and these rail-side members. The 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable.

Specifically, insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are bored in two places of the rail side member 521a, and a pair of columnar insertion pins 521b1 inserted into the two insertion holes 521a1 are formed from the liquid crystal side member 521b. It is thrust. The inter-axis distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the inter-axis distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

In this case, the axial directions of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 are orthogonal to the slide direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 over the entire circumference, and the gap can cause the two to be displaced relative to each other in either direction (direction perpendicular to both axes). can.

A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1 to prevent the insertion pin 521b1 from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion into which the insertion hole 521a1 of the rail side member 521a is bored is set to be smaller than the protrusion dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. As a result, the rail-side member 521a can be displaced relative to the liquid crystal-side member 521b with respect to the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can form an inclined posture with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other side guided member 522 side as a fulcrum. For example, with respect to the rail-side member 521a, the liquid crystal-side member 521b precedes in the direction of slide displacement, and the distance between them increases on the front side in the direction of slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of slide displacement). Relative displacement in the form is acceptable. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523.

The liquid crystal display device 523 is a rectangular plate-like body viewed from the front, and as described above, is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side thereof is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a pattern or the like, and the side opposite to the one side. The other side is the decorated decorative surface 523b.

In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with columnar rotating shafts 523c from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each rotating shaft 523c is a one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and another side guided member. It is rotatably supported in the shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c of 522, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 via the rotating shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b2, 522c, and the rotation causes the display surface 523a. It is possible to form a posture in which the face is directed to the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

The axis of the rotating shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, since the liquid crystal display is arranged in the liquid crystal display device 523, the display surface 523a side is heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetrical shape of the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotating shaft 523c. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated when the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotation drive mechanism arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521. The rotary drive mechanism is meshed with the drive motor 531 and the pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, the first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. ..

The rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 so that their displacement (rotation) speeds and displacement (rotation) timings (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same as each other. Will be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, regardless of whether the liquid crystal display device 523 faces the front of the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant.

A sliding groove 524a extending linearly along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 is bored in the connecting frame 524, and the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. It is inserted as possible. Since the connecting frame 524 is arranged on the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide drive mechanism described above, and the tip side thereof is a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid and displaced.

By connecting the connecting frame 524 between the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, the entire liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other side member 522 are connected. The rigidity of the liquid crystal can be increased. As a result, it is easy to maintain a constant facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522, and it is possible to facilitate smooth rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force during the rotational drive of the liquid crystal display device 523.

The facing member 525 is a plate-shaped member erected from the front of the connecting frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) and a predetermined interval (the surface of the liquid crystal display device 523) of the liquid crystal display device 523. They are arranged facing each other with an interval (interval that allows rotation). Further, a plurality of LEDs (effect means) are arranged on the facing member 525, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523 and facing each other.

A structure in which the slide member 520 configured in this way is slidly displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39 (a), 40 (a) and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b) and 41 (b) are the slide member 520. It is a rear view of.

In FIG. 39, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position, in FIG. 41, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position, and in FIG. 40, the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged from a close position. The transition state when the slide is displaced to the separated position or vice versa is shown in the figure. Further, FIG. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, respectively.

Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same displacement speed (slide displacement due to expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and displacement timing (start of displacement or stop of displacement). Is set (controlled). Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged in the inward protruding position (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is in a shortened state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the close position. Is placed in. From this state, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions with respect to the base end side thereof, the tip end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connecting frame 524, whereby the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 523 is slidably displaced in the direction of extending the slide rail 510.

When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are placed in the outwardly inverted position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). , The slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position.

On the other hand, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in the direction opposite to the above-described case from the state shown in FIG. 41, the tip end side of the transmission arms 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connecting frame 524. , The liquid crystal display device 523 is slidably displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 were further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 were placed in the inwardly projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 was shortened. The state is set, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a close position.

FIG. 42 (a) is a reference view, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front schematic view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

In the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). Since the other configurations of the reference structure are the same as those of the present embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed so as to be slidable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522. It is formed from a liquid crystal display device 523 that is pivotally supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as the slide displacement, and the variation of the effect operation can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decorative surface 523b can be visually recognized by the player.

However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation is started or stopped. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (one side guided member X, the other side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force is applied expands and contracts the slide rail 510. , The slide is displaced. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 only while keeping it stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. Allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) arranged on the side guided member 521, and the side arranged on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The permissible amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 of 42 (b) left side) can be made different.

As a result, when an inertial force is applied due to the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is displaced to the other side. It is easier to displace than the 522 side, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction (FIG. 42 (b) vertical direction) (FIG. 42 (b) left direction). .. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510 (that is, restricting the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). It is possible to prevent the 520 from being slidably displaced. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) arranged on the one-side guided member 521 is arranged on the other-side guided member 522. One-sided guided member 521 in a form in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side to be installed (left side in FIG. 42B). Rotational drive means (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534) are arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the above (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotary drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism is arranged so that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is directed toward the direction away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced by a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

FIG. 43A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at a separated position, and FIG. 43B is a front schematic view schematically showing the liquid crystal display device 523 at a close position. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism 500 in the arranged state.

Here, in the above-mentioned reference structure (see FIG. 42 (a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidably displaced in a direction close to each other and arranged in a close position, they come into contact with each other in a close position without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431 and each gear 432, 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for sliding-displace the liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, which causes damage to them.

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at the position where the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in anticipation of the dimensional tolerance, the assembly tolerance, or the control tolerance (the liquid crystal display devices 523 are located close to each other). When a sufficient gap is set between the two so that the two do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), and the appearance (effect). Causes deterioration.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 formed in this way are arranged to face each other in a staggered posture while being connected as possible. That is, one side guided member 521 of one slide member 520 is attached to the other side guided member 522 of the other slide member 520, and the other side guided member 522 of one slide member 520 is one side of the other slide member 520. They are arranged to face each other on the guided member 521.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are brought into contact with each other at the close position due to slide displacement in the direction in which they are close to each other, one of the slide members 520 is one and the other is one. When the side guided member 521 is relatively displaced (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 in the other (other and one) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can be tilted with respect to the direction of slide displacement, respectively).

Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (drive motor 431, each gear 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, so that the position where the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is closer. Can be set to position. As a result, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state where the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (effect) can be improved accordingly.

Here, in the present embodiment, the other side guided member 522 is provided with a detected portion, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the cover member 420, and the detected portion is provided. Is detected by the detection sensor, so that it is detected that the slide member 520 is slid and displaced to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the posture of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, the positional deviation of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor) can be suppressed. As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of a slide rail 510 and a slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other). Although the case where the two sets are arranged facing each other (that is, the phases are different from each other by 180 °) is described, the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment has a slide member 520 and a slide member having different configurations. The 2520 is provided, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 46 is a reference view, which is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 45, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. Moreover, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, two sets of slide rails 510 have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, have a phase of 180), as in the case of the first embodiment. They are placed facing each other in different postures.

In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the case of the first embodiment. A slide member 2520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of the other set (lower side of FIGS. 44 and 45).

In the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520, the one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520, and the other side guided member 522 in one set of slide members 520 are It is arranged so as to face the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520.

That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 2520 have slide displacements of both members 520 and 2520 in the plan view shown in FIGS. 44 and 45. It is arranged in a line-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual line located in the center in the direction of and perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46, as described above, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since they are arranged facing each other in the posture, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 is the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520 and the other side in one set of slide members 520. The guided member 522 is arranged so as to face the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520.

That is, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 520 are centered in the direction of slide displacement of both members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. It is arranged in a point-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual point (that is, the center of rotation of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300) located at the center in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. NS.

Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 of the first embodiment, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, it is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in one set of slide members 520. The displacement component in the direction of inertia and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in alternating directions (point-symmetrical directions, that is, the base member 400 and the cover member 420. The base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of the arrow R in FIG. 46 with respect to the back case 300 in order to give the rotational inertia. That is, it was difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides is applied. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 are in the same direction (directions that are line-symmetrical). ).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, it is possible to prevent the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, showing a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 is arranged on the right side in the front view.

In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise) from the first rotation position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47)). The one-sided guided member 521 of one set of slide members 520 and the one-sided guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520 are arranged on the lower side in the front view (lower side in the vertical direction), respectively. Can be done.

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and an inertial force is applied due to the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement, the slide displacement The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of (the displacement component in the direction of pressing the slide members 520 and 2520 against the slide rail 510 (regulating the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) is vertically upward (direction opposite to the gravity direction, the figure) 47 upward direction).

As a result, when the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-mentioned direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity is eliminated. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, in a state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (a state in which the slide members 520 and 2520 are slidly displaced in the horizontal direction), the one-side guided member 521 is the other-side guided member 522. Although the case where the member is arranged on the lower side in the vertical direction is described, the one-side guided member 521 of the third embodiment is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction with respect to the other side guided member 522. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically illustrating the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position. Moreover, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is arranged on the slide rail 510 (lower side).

That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position, the one-sided guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one-sided cover in the other set of slide members 520. The guide member 521 and the guide member 521 are respectively arranged on the left side in the front view.

When the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment configured in this way also exerts an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, as in the case of the second embodiment, on the other hand. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the set of slide members 2520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in the same direction (line). The orientation can be symmetrical).

Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, it is possible to prevent the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at predetermined rotation positions with respect to the back case 300.

FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, showing a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged in the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 of the slide member 520 of the above is arranged on the left side in the front view.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position (that is, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 50)). The one-sided guided member 521 of one set of slide members 2520 and the one-sided guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 520 can be arranged on the upper side in the front view (upper side in the vertical direction), respectively. ..

As a result, when the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47 and an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement is caused. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component that generates a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be set downward in the vertical direction (gravity direction, lower side in FIG. 50). As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member 520 from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable portion and the sliding portion from being damaged due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 is provided with rotary drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510, the rotary drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and each gear 532-534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to easily suppress the slide member 520 from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism is arranged so that its drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is oriented away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The position of the center of gravity of the above can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced by a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

This makes it easier to use the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction is used as the force (braking force) for pressing the slide rail 510. The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, it is possible to easily suppress the slide member 520 from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to the rattling caused by the lifting.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in the center in the width direction has been described, but the rotating shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is located at an eccentric position in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. Is arranged in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 according to the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 52 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in a state where the liquid crystal surface 523a is directed to the front side, and FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic front view showing the decorative surface 523b facing the front side. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically illustrated the slide mechanism 4500 in the state. Note that FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) show a state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is arranged at a separated position.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, a columnar rotating shaft 4523c is projected from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523, as in the case of the first embodiment. The rotating shaft 4523c is rotatably supported in the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c of the one-side guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other-side guided member 4522.

That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 4521 and the other-side guided member 4522 via the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c, and the rotation causes the display surface 523a. It is possible to form a posture in which the face is directed to the front side (player side) and a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

In this case, the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2, 4522c are separated from the opposing member 525 in the direction of slide displacement from the forming position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (FIG. 52 (a). ) And FIG. 52 (b) in the vertical direction).

In the rotary drive mechanism of the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are separated from the rotary drive mechanism of the first embodiment by the amount that the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. A third gear 4535 is additionally arranged between the and.

Here, as described above, the facing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surfaces (display surface 523a and decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 are arranged. Light is formed so as to be able to irradiate light toward the connecting surface), and the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 is played from between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 and facing each other (gap). It is possible to make the effect visible to the person.

Therefore, if the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, a space (gap) through which the light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 passes cannot be secured, and the light can be effectively used by the player. It cannot be visually recognized.

In this case, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display from the facing distance through the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420. Since the device 81 is made visible to the player, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured to the maximum extent. On the other hand, the facing distance between the pair of facing members 525 (the vertical distance in FIG. 52A) must be limited to the arrangement space (that is, the size can be accommodated between the facing portions of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300. It cannot be expanded because it receives).

Therefore, if the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and the space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the facing spaces, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it becomes difficult to secure a gap for irradiating, reflecting, or passing the LED light, while narrowing the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 in order to secure such a gap. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the forming positions of the rotating shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are eccentrically positioned on one side in the direction of slide displacement, and therefore, depending on the rotating position of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The distance (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 facing each other can be increased or decreased.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side. .. Therefore, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of protrusion of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced accordingly, and as a result, the player can reduce the third symbol display device. A visible area for visually recognizing the 81 can be secured.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotated so that the decorative surface 523b is oriented toward the front side, so that the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased. .. Therefore, a space (gap) through which the light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can pass can be secured, and as a result, the space (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 and the facing member 525 can be secured. It is possible to effectively perform the effect of making the player visually recognize the light.

Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to arrange the facing member 525 at a position away from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, to increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the slide mechanism 4500 can be miniaturized. That is, while allowing the slide mechanism 4500 to be accommodated between the outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of the light emitted from the LED are compatible. Can be done.

Next, when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa, a method of suppressing the driving force required for the rotation will be described.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed in close positions in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place in. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has a posture in which the display surface 523a faces the front side, while the other side (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed toward the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be arranged at a position eccentric to the upper side of the center in the vertical direction, so that the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400. Can be made to.

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 53 (a)), and the second rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (b) is changed from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (a). When rotating to, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by a broken arrow in FIG. 53 (b)) can be a locus that moves downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can rotate by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are placed in close positions in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place in. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity with rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54 (a)) is in a posture in which the display surface 523a is directed toward the front side. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the side that moves to the side opposite to the direction of gravity with rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54 (a)) has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is eccentric to the side that moves away from the center of rotation of the base member 400 and moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation (that is, the position of the center of gravity G). It can be arranged on the left side of FIG. 54 (a).

Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 54 (a)), and the first rotation shown in FIG. 54 (b) is performed from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54 (a). When rotating to a position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by a broken arrow in FIG. 54 (b)) can be a locus that moves downward (in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force acting on the center of gravity G in the direction of gravity (downward) can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can rotate by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. Further, FIG. 56 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the LVI-LVI line of FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56 (b). It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 formed of a resin material and forming a passage through which the game ball flows down. The passage member 5600 has a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (left-right direction in FIG. 55 (b)) and a rolling plate 5610 on the front side (55 (b) front side of the paper surface). The front wall portion 5620 arranged, the back wall portion 5630 disposed on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)), and a part of the back wall portion 5630 are placed on the back side. It mainly includes an overhanging wall portion 5640 formed by overhanging.

The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface is a rolling surface of a game ball, and is formed by a first portion formed by inclining downward from an end portion in the width direction of the game board 13 and a first portion thereof. A W-shaped rolling surface in front view is formed from a second portion that is inclined upward from the end portion on the downward inclination side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed in the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and descends toward the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)). A recess 5611 that is inclined and a recess 5612 that is recessed in the uppermost portion of the second portion and is inclined downward toward the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 55 (b)) are arranged.

The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and prevents the game ball from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is notched at a portion corresponding to the recess 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball accepted in the recess 5611 can be dropped.

The overhanging wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for allowing a game ball that rolls on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and is a rolling member. The game ball that rolls the plate 5610 and is received in the recess 5612 is received in the overhanging wall portion 5640.

Here, the operation unit 200 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the overhanging wall portion 5640 is projected from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL) is used to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. )'S movable range is limited, and its effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is set to a slightly larger dimension, while the depth dimension from the front surface to the inner wall surface of the back wall portion 5630 (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 57) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by a virtual plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630 at the top having an arcuate cross section in the overhanging direction (right side in FIG. 56, upper side in FIG. 57). An opening 5641 is formed in the chamfered portion so that the width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

That is, since the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball is projected outward from the opening 5641, the entire game ball is inner circumference. Compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size surrounding the overhanging wall portion 640, the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 to the back surface side can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL can be secured accordingly.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 6600 according to the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 57. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions erected from the back wall portion 5630 and a wall portion connecting the erected tips of the pair of wall portions. Is formed into a U-shaped cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion on the overhanging tip side (upper side of FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

The opening 6641 is formed so that its width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) is reduced from the inner wall surface side to the outer wall surface side of the overhanging wall portion 6640. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is formed as an inclined surface. As a result, the amount of protrusion that allows a part of the game ball to project outward from the opening 6641 is expanded, and the overhang dimension L2 of the overhang wall portion 5640 can be suppressed, while the peripheral edge portion (with the inclined surface) of the opening 6641. It is possible to secure the maximum thickness dimension at the portion to be formed) and to secure the rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 on the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhanging wall portion 5640. The angle of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5461 is in contact with the game ball. As a result, while ensuring a projectable amount that allows a part of the game ball to project outward from the opening 6641, it is possible to suppress the reception of the object on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) ( That is, it is possible to suppress damage to the overhanging wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening 6641) by receiving the game ball at the ridgeline portion S having a relatively high rigidity).

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a back wall portion 7652 arranged to face the front wall portion 7651, and their front surfaces. A side wall portion 7653 is provided on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652, respectively, and a passage through which the game ball flows down is formed by a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by each of the wall portions 7651 to 7653. ..

Here, the passage member 7600 projects the front wall portion 7651 and a part of the back wall portion 7652 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) toward the back wall portion, thereby causing the front inner peripheral wall portion 7600 to project. A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is formed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (to the right in FIG. 59 (a)). Since the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening 7654 to the outside, not only the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed, but also the damage and wear of the passage member 7600 can be suppressed. It can be done easily.

That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (to the right in FIG. 59 (a)), it is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a, which has no opening 7654 and has a relatively high rigidity, and can prevent the game ball from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear at the peripheral edge of the opening 7654, which are relatively low in rigidity due to the opening formation of the opening 7654.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In FIG. 60, the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a) and a back wall portion 7652 (back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) as in the case of the seventh embodiment. And from the side wall portion 7653, a passage having a substantially rectangular cross section and being bent is formed. In the present embodiment, an opening 8654 is formed in the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. Since the opening 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening 8654 to the outside, the overhanging dimension L4 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set at a position overlapping with the range Rg which is the displacement locus of a part of the game ball protruding from the opening 8654. As a result, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhanging dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the effect of the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

In this case, the passage member 8600 is provided with a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting the passage of the game ball on the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening 8654, respectively. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654 because the game ball does not exist in the passage of the passage member 8600. It is possible to grasp that it is in a state where it has not been done.

Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is included in the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the game ball is not projected from the opening 8654. By controlling the slide unit SL to be displaced to a position where it overlaps with, it is possible to avoid the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slide-displaced due to the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of rod-shaped bodies (one side member and the other side) are described. Members) are arranged, and the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are moved by sliding the one-side guided member 521 (rail-side member 521a) and the other-side guided member 522 along the pair of rod-shaped bodies. It may be slide-displaced.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a configuration that enables relative displacement between the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b in the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. The structure may be such that the relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least toward the display surface 523a from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may coincide with the axis of the rotating shaft 523c.

Further, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotating shaft 523c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center of the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be located eccentrically on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, the position of the center of gravity along the axial center of the rotating shaft 523c is preferably eccentric to the side close to the drive motor 531 of the rotary drive mechanism. This is because the bias of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be utilized as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are arranged so as to be slidable with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Members of other displacement forms (displacement members) may be arranged.

For example, a pair of rotating bodies rotatably supported by the cover member 420 may be provided with a rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 as a point of symmetry, and the rotation directions of the two are opposite. As a result, the inertial forces associated with the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be canceled out, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, it is possible to facilitate only the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies while keeping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 stopped at predetermined rotational positions with respect to the back case 300.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation drive mechanism (drive motor 531 and pinion gear 532, first gear 533 and second gear 534) is arranged on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 has been described. The rotation drive mechanism is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotation drive mechanism may be arranged on the other side guided member 521.

In this case, when the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and an inertial force is applied due to the start of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement, the liquid crystal display device 523 is operated. Due to the rotational inertia of the liquid crystal, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement from becoming too large. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid and displaced in the horizontal direction while being able to suppress the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 by the inertial force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passage of the game ball flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other members are objects. May be. For example, it may be a spherical member used for the production outside the game area.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member A part of the rear peripheral wall portion 7652a may be displaced from the opening 8654 to a position where the passage member 8600 is inserted into the inside. In this case, the displacement region of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member toward the front side, and it is possible to give power by bringing it closer to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the range Rg on the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a, the portion overlapping the range Rg on the back surface of the back outer wall 7652a of the slide unit SL can be independently displaced. As a variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the portion of the variable structure. As a result, when interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to take measures to quickly suppress the interference with the game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126. In the first control example, when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a, the over-winning effect is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over prize during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

As an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation is high is easily displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential shape. As a result, even when the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In addition to displaying a suggestion for right-handed hitting, a voice suggesting right-handed hitting (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed") may be output. As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured in.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed straddling the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the effect can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (sliding) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven left and right (slide). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 62A, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

In this control example, the display is configured based on the image data of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Specifically, the image data represented by the coordinates (0,0) to (X, Y3) is used, and the image data in the region from (0,0) to (X, Y1) is the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The image data displayed on the upper display surface 523a and in the area from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image in the area from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) is displayed. The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 62B is a schematic view showing the content of the effect at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62B, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a close position, and a button on which the characters "PUSH" are drawn is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. The production is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In this control example, the effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) provided on the slide member 520 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is downward. By sliding it downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), the display area used for the effect display is expanded, and the symbol (in FIG. 63, a symbol imitating a "fish") is enlarged using the enlarged display area. An effect display is executed to make the player or increase the number of symbols.

With this configuration, it is possible to display a wide variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to a position where they abut, the upper half of the symbol is on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower half of the symbol is on the lower side. The display is controlled so that the display surface 523a2 displays.

Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is diverted from the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately prepare display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the amount of data can be reduced.

In this control example, the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81, but other configurations may be used, for example, displaying on the third symbol display device. Even if the display area for displaying information related to the game to be played (for example, display of the number of stored memories or display of abnormality) is configured to be visible regardless of the position of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. good.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts the slide movement from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)) and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). The same display objects (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid to move. This can be realized by moving the display position of the displayed object according to the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

Then, as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. The third symbol display device 81 displays a symbol corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 and the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and displays the third symbol. The symbol to be displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), and the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in the order of the display surface (middle design).

In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, and lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, it is clear to the player which symbol is displayed. It is a difficult state to grasp. In this state, since each symbol is overlapped so that the symbol (middle symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the most difficult to see, what kind of symbol is the last symbol to appear to the player? It is possible to execute the production while expecting the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63 (b) will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progressed.

As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, as the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated from each other to display the third symbol display device 81. By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually expanded. Even in this state, the same display objects (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid.

Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed so that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol is gradually reduced. With this configuration, for the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, the display data corresponding to the specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63A) is displayed. It is only necessary to execute the control of moving the position according to the slide movement of each display surface, and there is an effect that the load of the display control can be reduced.

Further, the effect display that gradually reduces the overlap of the symbols is simply fixed by actually moving the display surface (upper display 523a1, lower display surface 523a2, display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that the sense of incongruity given to the player can be suppressed as compared with the case of executing on the display surface.

In this case, the timing of slide movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) is changed, or the slide movement speed is changed, and the slide movement of each display surface is supported. Display control should be executed. This has the effect of further enhancing the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 64 (b) will be described. FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progressed.

By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (the display surfaces are separated to the maximum extent). It will be in a state where it slides to the position). In this state, the player can visually recognize the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols, so that the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the display effect of this time can be grasped.

In this control example, when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are executed. , Other than that, it may be used. For example, after displaying that the special symbol has won the jackpot with the third symbol, it is used for a technique (so-called probabilistic promotion production) that notifies whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot by using an effect display. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the display contents when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated will be described. FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing an aspect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) shows the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 on the left and right. It is a figure which shows the mode in the case of abutting in a direction.

When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is sub. By correcting according to the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to display the same display mode as before the rotation. Even in this case, since the display data displayed on each display surface is diverted from the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to separately prepare the display data and the amount of data can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Next, the reversing operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In this control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the above-mentioned display surfaces (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) are provided on one surface side thereof, and on the other surface side. Is provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1 and lower decorative surface 523b2).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 68, an effect mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted at a position covering the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is facing the front side, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which started to turn to the side (the state which the decorative surface started to turn to the front side). The sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state of concealing most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side. ”The main effect is switched to the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. A decorative symbol Z indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed at the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, and a decorative symbol Z on the front side is displayed on the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2. The sub LED 290 is arranged at the corresponding position. FIG. 68 is a view showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are facing the front side, respectively. By inverting, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected (contacted and arranged) in parallel) to form an apple pattern, so that the characters "CHANGE" are formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is decorated with a corrugation, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip of each. Among them, the bottom LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of a sub LED 290. FIG. 68A is a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B is a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is inverted and the display surface becomes invisible, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed notification mode, which is a suggestion mode of the launch position of the game ball during the jackpot game, will be described. FIG. 69A is a right-handed notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The characters "right-handed" are displayed curved in a three-circle shape (ring shape), and each of these characters is rotated clockwise and displayed during the jackpot game. In this control example, in the variable winning device 65, the game ball that has flowed down the right side (right side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 has flowed down the left side (left side flow path) of the third symbol display device 81. The game ball is placed at a position where it is easier to win a prize than the ball (lower right side of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle so as to pass the game ball through the left flow path and perform the game so as to win a prize in the first starting port 64 by operating the handle so as to have a left-handed firing intensity. The ball is fired, but during the jackpot game, the game is performed by operating the handle so that the firing strength is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path.

Here, the right-handed notification mode is displayed to notify that the steering wheel is operated with the firing strength at which the game ball passes through the right-handed flow path, and the right-handed character rotates to the right to notify the right-handed flow path. The position (direction) of the handle and the rotation direction of the handle are simultaneously notified.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game to conceal the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the upper right side of the upper display surface 523a1 in a right-handed notification mode. Further, FIG. 69 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated to the right. In this case, it is displayed on the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (the actual display position is unchanged from FIG. 69 (b)). In this case as well, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the right-handed character display direction or the character rotation display direction.

As described above, in this control example, by rotating the right-handed character display in a ring shape and displaying it, even if the displayed display surface is rotated, the correct position is notified without changing the display mode. Can be done. Therefore, the load of the display control process can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various right-handed notification modes are prepared.

In this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed in characters, but a symbol of an arrow configured in a ring shape or a symbol imitating a game ball may be rotated. Further, a design imitating a handle that changes the firing intensity of the game ball may be rotated and displayed.

Next, a modified example of the right-handed notification mode in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modified example of the right-handed notification mode. In this modification, it is changed in that three ring-shaped arrow symbols curved to the right are added to the back side of the right-handed character display.

FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area of the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in a display area composed of a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. In the first area α, an arrow pattern curved to the right is displayed by rotating it to the right, and in the second area β and the third area γ, the characters “right-handed” are displayed along the ring shape, respectively. It is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in the layer above the arrow symbol that is rotated and displayed, and the arrow symbol that is rotated and displayed is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. In addition, three arrow symbols are set, and when the arrow symbol of 1 moves to the back surface of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is variably set according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

FIG. 147 (a) is a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow symbol. It is set. Therefore, the arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and the right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees to the right. In this case, the character display layer of the third area β is set below the arrow symbol layer, and the character display layer of the first area α is set above the arrow symbol.

With this configuration, the arrow symbol pointing to the right is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and the correct position of the right flow path can be notified to the player. In this modified example, the position where the arrow is displayed was changed by changing the layer setting, but the position is not limited to this, and the rotating coordinates of the right-handed notification mode are changed and set (the right-handed notification mode is subordinated). It may be configured to be variable by rotating (rotating according to the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523).

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, details for setting the effects described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described. In this control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and moved, the effect of correcting the display position of the symbol according to the amount of the slide movement is performed.

Specifically, the symbol 2 is based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid in response to the upward variation of the upper display surface 523a1 from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b). The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

Further, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid and moved in accordance with the downward variation of the lower display surface 523a2.

In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbols expand as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and moves. The effect can be displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) are reached. A second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the winning of the prize is provided, and each of these areas is hit by the first hit according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a general drawing execution area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a ball on either side. The value of the random number counter C4 per second is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal start port (through gate) 67 of the above.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 71. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is either "0 to 9". It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random number value "0" is for low probability. It is stored in the random number table for the first time. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40".

It should be noted that the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time are duplicated values. A random number value that is a big hit may be set so as not to be. If there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot of the special symbol is changed by changing the random value that becomes the jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 29", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the type is not limited to one, and two or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 64.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown, the voice lamp control device 113 also has the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a set, and more detailed fluctuations correspond to the types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the fluctuation pattern commands output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of winning random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is only "1 second x 2 times". It will be released, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74.

FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73A. FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73A) is a table in which the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

In the first random number table 202a, a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot at a low probability, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol are displayed. A jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is provided, and the number of determination values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by making the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73B) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected respectively. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the jackpot B.

Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, a lottery as to whether or not the probability change state is reached). However, in the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery for whether or not the probability change state is reached is not executed).

Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)). At least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74 (d)) is specified. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving game state is set in addition to this.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 74B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 74 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2. The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, and acquires it from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 74 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that becomes an deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 72B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Probability change flag 203g, Probability change setting flag 203h, Probability change pass counter 203i, Winning number counter 203j, Operation counter 203k, Notification counter 203m, Remaining ball timer flag 203n, Remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time reduction / medium counter 203t, a sign flag 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on winning a prize is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 640 (with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 up to 4. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting winning) into the second winning opening 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 up to 4. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 85).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the first special symbol N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the first special symbol N2) is , The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the hold ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. be.

The voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the reserved ball number (waiting number of times) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90). : No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power off occurs, the state immediately before the power off is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probabilistic switching switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off based on the on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65a5 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to turn on and turning on the power again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated one by one when passing through the probability variation switch 65a5 (see S1511 in FIG. 98). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (see S1202 in FIG. 95). .. On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65a5 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this control example, the voice "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1402 of the notification processing (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is urged to see the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification, is displayed. In the 13th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic gaming state is given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 13th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 12 rounds, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In this control example, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual state, and the jackpot B is obtained. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65a5.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When this probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. Indicates that no time has passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball may pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203q is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65a5. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probabilistic change switch 65a5 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and not to be determined to have passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65a5 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as false detection of passage through a magnetic sensor due to radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this control example, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

The sign flag 203u acquires the winning information that becomes a big hit when the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, and the winning information that has already been put on hold (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). It is a flag indicating that the winning information that becomes the jackpot A (that is, there is a possibility of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state) is stored in the information). This sign flag 203u is changed based on the winning information when the winning information that becomes a big hit when the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state is acquired in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 88) (S507: Yes in FIG. 88). Is set to ON when it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in a probabilistic game state when is started (that is, there is winning information that becomes a jackpot A by then) (S508: Yes in FIG. 88). NS. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the winning information command indicating that the sign flag 203u is turned on (see S511 in FIG. 88). Then, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (that is, when the probability variation game state is entered) in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game (see S1304 in FIG. 96). Set to off. Although not shown, when it is determined in the ending process (FIG. 96) that the jackpot game based on the winning information with the sign flag 203u turned on has ended (that is, the jackpot game of jackpot A has been executed). The sign flag 203u is also set to off even when the game does not shift to the probabilistic game state).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotary motor 431, reverse motor 531). , Sub LED 290, clock generator (CLK) 900 and the like are connected respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding the display surface 523a, which is the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and has the upper display surface 523a1 in the parallel direction to the gaming machine, to move the motor, and is composed of a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is composed of a stepping motor which is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2, respectively, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a1 are provided. The 523a2 and the 523a2 can be rotated independently of each other. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently so that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the back side. Is.

The sub LED 290 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative symbol Z (decorative symbol Z) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( It is configured to notify the player by blinking that the special symbol is changing instead of (a symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing).

As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms cycle to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The clock generator 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for blinking control of the sub LED 290 and the decorative symbol Z at the same timing by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position where it overlaps the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 blinks 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. It is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing and prevent the player from being confused.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and various other types necessary for controlling the game. Data, programs, etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (disengagement, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Here, the details of the over winning table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over winning table 222b. The over-winning table 222b is a table used for selecting an over-winning effect in the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the over-winning table 222b includes a winning over-winning table 222b1 and a predictive over-winning table. 222b2 and a detached over winning table 222b3 are provided.

The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the winning over winning table 222b1 defines the production content selected as the over winning effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and differs depending on the number of rounds. It has become.

Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and " If it is "150 to 198", it becomes "foam", and if it is "199", it becomes "fish school".

"Fish school" is selected as the production content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when there is a big hit winning information in the reserved winning information). By displaying the effect of "fish school" as the over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the winning information held for the player includes the winning information that is a big hit.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "100 to 189". If it is, it becomes a "foam", and if it is "190-199", it becomes a "fish school". In this way, as the round in the jackpot game progresses, the jackpot game is configured so that the over-winning effect indicating that the winning information that becomes the jackpot is held and the expectation is high is easily displayed. Even if it takes a long time, the player's interest can be improved.

In the predictive over winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information, and the probabilistic gaming state is reached by the time the fluctuation based on the held winning information is started. It is a table used when there is a possibility of shifting to (that is, when it is not certain that a big hit will be made after that, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none". (That is, it is not executed), and if it is "150 to 199", it becomes a "bubble".

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "100 to 199". If so, it becomes a "bubble".

The out-of-order over winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit in the reserved winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 179", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none". (That is, it is not executed), and if it is "180 to 199", it becomes a "bubble".

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 159", the effect content of the over-winning effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed), and "160 to 199". If so, it becomes a "bubble".

As described above, the out-of-order over-winning table 222b3 is configured so that "foam" is less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the predictive over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubbles" are displayed as an over-winning effect, the player can be expected to become a big hit after that, and the player's interest can be improved.

In this control example, as the over-winning effect, any one of three types of "none", "foam", and "fish school" is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be selected from four types, or it may be naturally selected from two types. Further, the effect content may be configured so that "none" (that is, not executed) is not selected, and the over-winning effect is displayed each time the over-winning is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over prize has been won.

Further, as an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls.

In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select an ending effect at the end of the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the ending table 222c includes a hit ending table 222c1 and a predictive ending table 222c2. , A detached ending table 222c3 is provided.

The winning ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the hit ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 19", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

In the predictive ending table 222c2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information, and it will be in the probabilistic gaming state by the time the fluctuation based on the held winning information starts. It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the predictive ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect, and "bubble" is used as the over-winning effect during the jackpot game. Is different depending on the number of times selected (the value of the bubble number counter 223j).

Specifically, when the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "0 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 149", the effect content of the ending effect is "none" (that is, it is not executed). ) Is selected, "foam" is selected if it is "150 to 179", and "special foam" is selected if it is "180 to 199".

Further, when the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "5 to 15" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. If it is "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if it is "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

When the value of the bubble count counter 223j is "16 or more" and the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and " If it is "50 to 99", "foam" is selected, and if it is "100 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

In this way, when many "foam" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select the ending effect of "foam" or "special foam" that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit after that. It is configured as follows. As a result, even though many "bubbles" are selected (displayed) in the over-winning production, a production with a low expectation (for example, "none") is selected in the ending production, so that the player's game It is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in motivation.

Further, when the ending effect is selected using the predictive ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur thereafter. Therefore, if many "bubble" effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effects is high. Will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, the privilege that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The out-of-order ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information that will be a big hit if the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state in the reserved winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect are defined in the detached ending table 222c2.

Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 159", "none" (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and if it is "160 to 189", "bubble". Is selected, and if it is "190-199", "special bubble" is selected.

In this control example, only in the sign ending table 222c2, the provisions of the effect counter 223f and the effect content are changed according to the value of the bubble count counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same may be applied to the hit ending table 222c1 and the miss ending table 222c3.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the sub-liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523 are driven. Information is stored.

Specifically, the slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving the slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are rotationally moved in the circumferential direction. A rotary drive scenario 222d2 for driving the rotary motor 311 to be driven, and a reverse drive scenario 222d3 for driving the reverse motor 531 that reverses the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, respectively, are provided.

First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). In the slide drive scenario 222d1, set values (operating speed (pps), set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display, The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are specified.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), an operation for sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the close position corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m (outward route). Information related to (operation) is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

Here, since the operating speed of 50 pps outputs 50 pulses (steps) per second to the motor driver, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate in 100 steps (moving from a separated position to a close position). The time required to do this is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

Information related to the operation (return operation) for sliding-displace the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m is stored. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "5001" because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are placed close to each other. It is 5 seconds after the slide displacement to the separated position is started (that is, 3 seconds after the slide displacement for 2 seconds is completed).

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "7001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes "7001" 2 seconds after the operation for sliding displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is started (that is, that is). (When the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is completed). By reading out this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

As described above, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and then are maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds, and then 2 again. It slides from the near position to the separated position over a second.

Next, the contents of the rotation drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (c). Similarly, in the rotary drive scenario 222d2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are in the first rotation position (upper display) corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are left and right at the position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the second rotation position (positions above and below the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2). Information related to the operation (outbound operation) for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction.

The operation for rotating the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the second rotation position to the first rotation position in the circumferential direction corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m (return operation). ) Is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is specified as the operation speed, 360 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

As described above, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds. After being maintained at, it rotates again from the second rotation position to the first position over 3 seconds.

Next, the contents of the reversal drive scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (d). Similarly, in the reverse drive scenario 222d3, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side) corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information related to the operation (outward route operation) for reversing from the reversing position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction.

Corresponding to the value "5001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation (return operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to reverse from the reverse position to the normal position again is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is specified as the operation speed, 180 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

As described above, in the reversal drive scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses from the normal position to the reversal position over 2 seconds, is then maintained at the reversal position for 3 seconds, and then again takes 2 seconds from the reversal position to the normal position. Flip to position.

In this control example, the operation for one motor is defined in each drive scenario, but the operation is not limited to this. For example, a drive scenario for driving the reversing motor 531 after driving the slide motor 431 may be specified. As a result, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid and displaced to close positions and then inverted. As a result, the variation of driving (displacement) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub-winning number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble count counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z. Is provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. A detailed description will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effects and various lottery. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round has been executed in a jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting the over-winning effect in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over-winning effect according to the value of the round number counter 223 g, the over-winning effect can be selected (displayed) at a different ratio for each round.

The sub-winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the round of the jackpot game. The sub-winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control device 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and is a normal winning or over winning depending on the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Then, although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the “fish school” effect has been selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set to on when the over-winning effect of "fish school" is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set to off in the ending setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 104). See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probabilistic game state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Further, it is possible to prevent the so-called downfall, in which the effect of "foam" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over-winning effect.

The bubble count counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times that the “bubble” effect is selected as the over-winning effect. The bubble count counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the over-winning effect of "bubble" is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2111 in FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble count counter 223j is used when selecting the ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generator 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

Specifically, when it is determined in the lamp editing process (see FIG. 107) that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is added one by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, the sub LED 290 is turned on and the sub symbol is displayed, and when the value reaches 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is hidden. It is determined.

The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 in 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start the effect such as lighting the LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and 1 is added.

The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz). For example, it may change in a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may change in a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high (that is, the interval of change becomes short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may also be short. As a result, even when the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high, the clock counter 223k can be updated without missing the change.

The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing for executing control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the variation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, when a drive scenario is set in the drive scenario storage area 223n, which will be described later, one is added one by one. According to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, information for driving the motor set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) are acquired. ) Is driven and controlled.

The drive scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. In the drive scenario storage area 223 m, when the variation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106), the corresponding drive scenario 222d is stored. NS. Various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven and controlled based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223 m.

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It controls the variable effect) and the advance notice effect.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 and the clock generator 900 are connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are bus lines on the output side of the input port 238. It is connected via 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when the incoming ball is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear A corresponding to the "city stage", the rear B corresponding to the "empty stage", and the rear C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the 81, and the image controller 237 displays the image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image horizontally from left to right. Is drawn. As a result, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round effects, and demo effects are available.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the player can have it. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to a game information-related command, one display related to a jackpot-related command, and one display data table corresponding to a round effect and a demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), The symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 82). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 82).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, in the example of FIG. 15). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 109) (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111B) and a simple display setting process so that the image when the power is turned on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later, which describes the instruction contents for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 111 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 83) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a rear image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 111 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed, it is performed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generator 900 is also input to the voice lamp control device 113, and by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223 m, the effect can be easily synchronized with the sound lamp control device 113. Can be made to.

Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is added one by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes in a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 in 100 ms. Therefore, if it is desired to start the effect such as lighting the LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from the value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when the value is 65535 and 1 is added.

Although the details will be described later, the clock output of the clock generator 900 is started after the start-up process of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 in FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, after the start-up process of the display control device 114, which requires more processing time than the voice lamp control device 113, is completed (that is, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed). Since the clock output is started, the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has an area of a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and an inversion amount storage area 233p3.

This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates and display angles of each image constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. As a result, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidably moved or rotated, a suitable effect can be displayed.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is other than the demo display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 and the like in FIG. 115A). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When they reach 299, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the change display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of jackpot A is set (16 rounds, etc.). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is different (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221).

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of whether or not it is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so the first obtained in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)) for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a jackpot of a special symbol, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a jackpot indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for the value when there is.

When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S502), and if the game state is a probabilistic change (S502: Yes), the first random number table 202a has a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the game state is not probable (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). In the process of S505, if the lottery result is determined to be a big hit (S505: Yes), a big hit is indicated, a winning information command including the big hit type is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, if it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S505: No), then whether or not the lottery result is a big hit if the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change game state. Determine (S507).

In the process of S507, if the lottery result is out of the game even if the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change game state (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the loss is set (S508). End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S507, if the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is the probabilistic gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then the probable change state is entered at the start of the fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is a possibility of this (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the changing winning information or the pending winning information includes the winning information that is a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic state.

In the processing of S508, if there is no possibility of shifting to the probabilistic state at the start of fluctuation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state) (S508: No), a prize indicating a loss is obtained. An information command is set (S509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, if there is a possibility that the state has shifted to the probabilistic change state at the start of the fluctuation (that is, there is a jackpot winning information that shifts to the probabilistic game state) (S508: Yes), there is a high probability. The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the game and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to on (S511), the sign flag 203u is shown to be on, and the winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the process of S520 is set (S512), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability change game state is given until the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in this control example, by executing the processes S507 to S512, if there is winning information that is a big hit that can pass through the probability change switch 65a5, the lottery results at the high probability time and the low probability time are displayed. It can be acquired and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect in both the case where the probabilistic game state is given and the case where the probabilistic game state is not given.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 73 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 73 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 93, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 86) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 91 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 93). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, the opening scenario corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), the number of rounds command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106). When it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is reached (S1106: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to off just in case in the processing of S1009.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302). If it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1303), and this process is terminated. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on.

On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65a5 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game is determined. You can play the game with interest.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the 12th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 12th round is reached (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter for 2 seconds in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 12th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, by providing a notification counter 203 m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 12th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), the notification command is set (S1406). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is added and updated by 1, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is executed. Set (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). After that, the process of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball ejection time has been in progress since the opening / closing door 65f1 was closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the process of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the process of S1508 is executed.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1512). After that, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to on (S1515). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is ON (S1516). If the probabilistic valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). When it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the probability variation effective flag 203q is set to off (S1519). The probabilistic change effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65a5 from being improperly passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65a5 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormal processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1601). If it is outside the round validity period (S1601: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1603). After that, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed.

In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1605) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prize counters 203j) match. (S1607).

If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). After that, the process of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65a5 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value 0 (S1610). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1611), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1815 (see FIG. 101) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 of FIG. 101), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1815. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1815 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1815. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1817 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the data shifts to S1708.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1817 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1708 is performed via the processes of S1704 to S1706. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1710, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1711), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that when the processing of S1708 is reached via the processing of S1704 to S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1801 this time was executed (S1801), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1802 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1813 and the command determination process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1810 is completed, the sub liquid crystal drive process is executed in order to drive the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) (S1811). Details of this sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

After the sub-liquid crystal drive process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1818), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to the process of S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the process of S1908, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is performed when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1908. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1907, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command ("Look at the liquid crystal" in this control example) is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1910).

Next, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command has been received (S1911). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the process of S1913. The details of the jackpot-related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

On the other hand, in the process of S1911, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of S1913 as it is.

In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

Next, the jackpot-related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S1912). This jackpot-related process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related process, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223 g (S2004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223 g (S2005), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received in the processing of S2006 (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2008.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is larger than 10 (S2008). In the processing of S2008, when the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls than the predetermined winning number (10 pieces) in one round have entered the specific winning opening 65a (S 2008: Yes). This is the case (so-called over-winning). In this case, the over-winning process is executed (S2009), and this process is terminated. The details of the over-winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), in order to execute the normal winning effect, the normal effect command is set and the present End the process.

In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011).

If it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S2011 (S2011: Yes), the ending setting processing is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing is terminated. do. The details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether or not the V-pass command has been received (S2014).

In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, and an effect suggesting that the probability change game state is given is executed. A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this process ends.

Here, the over-winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this over winning process (S2009). This over-winning process (S2009) is executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect based on over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the over-winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). When it is determined that there is winning information (S2103: Yes), the over-winning effect is selected from the winning over-winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103). , S2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the processing of S2103 (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the processing of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the sign over winning table 222b2 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. The winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the processing of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), it is over from the out-of-order over winning table 222b3 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. The winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

In the process of S2107, a display over-winning command indicating the over-winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to the process of S2108.

In the process of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is a "school of fish" (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to on (S2109), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2108, when it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not a "fish school" (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is a "bubble". (S2110). When it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is "foam" (S2110), the bubble count counter 223j is added by 1 (S2111), and this process ends. In the process of S2111, the number of times "bubbles" are selected in the over prize is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times "bubbles" are selected (FIG. 104).

In the process of S2110, if it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is not "bubble" (S2110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of over-winning differs depending on whether or not there is information that will be a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it will be a big hit after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the over-winning effect will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), in the over-winning effect, an effect suggesting that a probabilistic game state is given is already executed (displayed). Therefore, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probabilistic game state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is stored (S2204).

In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that the winning information that is the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205), the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2204, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is not stored (S2204: No), then the winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

In the processing of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), the effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2 and the process proceeds to S2209. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the off-ending ending table 222c3 and the processing of S2209 is performed. Move to.

In the processing of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the school flag 223i is set to off (S2210), and the value of the bubble count counter 223j is set. Set to 0 (S2211) to end this process.

In this way, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot differs depending on whether or not there is information that will be a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it will be a jackpot after that). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player executes the game paying attention to the ending effect, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variation display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1813). This variation display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2306 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2303).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the processing of S2304 is completed, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S2303 has a drive scenario setting (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that there is a drive scenario setting (S2305: Yes), the corresponding drive scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d to the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the drive scenario is stored. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the process of S2312, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and has the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. The setting such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by is executed.

In the lamp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processing of S2402 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). ..

If it is determined in the process of S2403 that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S2403: No), the process of S2404 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2407.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is reached (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be turned on is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the value of the determined clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. do.

In the process of S2407, another process for turning on the lamp is executed, and this process is terminated.

Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute the lighting of the sub LED and the display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I try to do it. As a result, it is possible to control the sub LED to be turned on at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

Next, the sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811). This sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, It is a process for driving (rotational drive, etc.).

In the sub-liquid crystal drive process (FIGS. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is not stored, the present process is terminated as it is because it is not the timing to drive the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the drive scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the drive scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

Then, in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area, it is determined whether or not there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223 m after addition (S2503). If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversal motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. The motor drive data is set (S2504) based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n, the drive data command is set (S2505), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2503, when it is determined that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the drive scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223 m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the drive scenario.

If it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 109, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2702, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2601) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2702. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2702 and S2702, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 109. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2603, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2604, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 123 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of the clock output is set for the clock generator 900 (S2607). As a result, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 starts up. Since the voice lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output is started after both the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 start up. Can be accurately synchronized in.

After that, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). FIG. 111A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2902) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2903) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 to 90.

In the display setting process (S2903), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, in order to correct the drawing contents, a drawing correction process is executed (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905), which are determined in the task process (S2904), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). When it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is added by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2912) is executed to display S2904. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3003).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3103, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3106), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S3102e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006). If there is a display variable type command (S3006: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3007), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S3202).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3203), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3202.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), and the jackpot is determined. If there is a related command, the display jackpot related command process is executed (S3009), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-mentioned jackpot-related command process for display (S3009), which is one process of the command determination process (see S2902 and FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301). S3301: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process proceeds to the process of S3303.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3405), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3603). S3604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3605), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display normal winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3307). If there is a display normal winning effect command (S3307: Yes), the normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

Here, the details of the normal winning effect command processing (S3308) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning effect command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display normal winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the normal winning effect command processing, first, a normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. Read from and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3705), the normal winning command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3307, if it is determined that there is no display normal winning effect command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ), If there is an over-winning effect command for display (S3309: Yes), the normal over-effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

Here, the details of the over-winning effect command processing (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a flowchart showing the over-winning effect command processing. This over-winning effect command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display over-winning effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the over-winning effect command processing, first, an over-winning effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over-winning effect indicated by the display over-winning effect command is determined, and the determined over-winning effect display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

Next, based on the over-winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the over-winning effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot-related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. In the processing of S3309, if it is determined that there is no display over winning effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command process ends.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 114. If it is determined in the process of S3311 that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the rear image change command is determined. If there is (S3010: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4001). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S4002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3010, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and there is an error command. If (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to the processing of S3001.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 112. In the processing of S3012, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

If it is determined that there is a counter command in the process of S3014 (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to the process of S3001. The counter command notifies the display control device 114 of the timing at which the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113. The lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the timing of lighting the notified sub LED 290. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, the sub symbol is set in the sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. As a result, the sub symbol is displayed at the same timing as the timing at which the sub LED 290 is turned on in the voice lamp control device 113 with reference to the display clock counter 223 m, which is a counter synchronized with the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be synchronized and produced.

In the process of S3014, if it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), then it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), it is received. The drive data storage area 223p is updated (S3017) based on the command, and the process proceeds to S3001.

By the process of S3017, the display content (for example, the display angle) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub-liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

If it is determined that there is no drive data command in the process of S3016 (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

In the processing of S3001 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), The processing of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S301 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this process is performed. End the command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 113 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4203: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S4205.

In S4205, the pointer update process is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4403), and if it is a demo display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4403: No). S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, the sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, the details of the sub-symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. This sub-symbol setting process is a process for displaying the sub-symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub LED 290 that is lit and controlled by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the sub-symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a variable period (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the period is not the fluctuation period (S4501: No), it is not the timing to display the sub-symbol displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is fluctuating (S4501), then it is determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is the lighting information.

When it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content acquired in the processing of S4206 of the display setting processing (see FIG. 119) Among them, the information of the sub symbol is set (changed) to lit, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the processing of S4206 of the display setting processing (see FIG. 119). Of these, the sub-design information is set (changed) to off, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the processing of S4207 is completed, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S4210).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S4311), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2904), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4216, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off instead of on (S4210: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S4218) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4217, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2912), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4703. Further, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2903) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S4802), and if it is the transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4807. Further, as a result of the processing of S4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to the process of S4813.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4813, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The discrimination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the above-mentioned drawing correction process (S2906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed in response to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), it is not necessary to correct the drawing content, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is being driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4902 in order to make a correction according to the driving state.

In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of movement that is being slid. (S4903), the process proceeds to S4904. In the process of S4903, by correcting the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3, the display position of the symbols 1 to 3 is integrally changed in response to the drive of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display). It is possible to improve the player's interest.

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the slide is not driven (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4904.

In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and display angles) of all the images are determined according to the amount of rotation being rotationally driven. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this process ends.

By the processing of S4905, the display coordinates (and the display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, so that a suitable effect is displayed even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2907), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S4302 (S4303). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 111B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, when the game ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a, the over-winning effect is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over prize during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

As an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of over-winning game balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to grasp the number of over-winning gaming balls. In addition, the effect may be changed according to the number of over-winning game balls. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of over-winning game balls, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the first control example, as the over-winning effect, the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation is high is easily displayed as the round in the jackpot game progresses. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is configured to be different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, even if the jackpot game lasts for a long period of time, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, character strings suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed right-handed right-handed) are arranged and displayed in a circumferential shape. As a result, even when the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In addition to displaying a suggestion for right-handed hitting, a voice suggesting right-handed hitting (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right-handed") may be output. As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably suggest (notify) that the game is in a game state in which the player strikes right.

In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. It was configured in.

As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the first control example, a symbol is displayed straddling the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol is changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 becomes invisible by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the effect can be suitably displayed.

In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (sliding) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven left and right (slide). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively utilized to perform the effect, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine that displays an effect when the gaming ball over-wins the specific winning opening 65a has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area that can be seen by the player, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is produced according to the number of stored game balls. It was configured to change the content of the production. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the first control example described above, the display screen (sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging the character strings (right-handed right-handed right-handed) suggesting right-handedness in a circumferential shape. The game machine that can preferably suggest that the game is in a right-handed gaming state even when the 81) is rotated has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the circumference thereof. The lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a shape are configured to suggest the gaming state. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is highlighted, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

In this second control example, with respect to the first control example, the variable winning device 65 is changed so that the winning game ball is stored in the area visible to the player, and the variable winning device 65 is over. A distribution member 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game ball and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member are provided, and a game state is provided on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. This is different from the point that the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting (the direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape. In addition, the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control process 113 have been partially changed. It differs in that it was done. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, in this control example, the difference is that the inside of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above is changed, and the other points are the same.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but in the variable winning device 65 in this control example, when the jackpot game is started, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, as in the first control example). , 15 times (round) repeatedly executed. In each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until a predetermined number (10) of balls are won).

In each round, up to a predetermined number of winning game balls are discharged by flowing down the normal winning flow path 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the game balls that have won more than a predetermined number (so-called over-winning game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

On the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1, a production unit for executing the production with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65 is formed. The details of this effect unit will be described with reference to FIG. 128. In each round game, more than 10 game balls (hereinafter referred to as over-winning) are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). The effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage flow path 65e4 is executed. In this control example, in each round, it is configured to show that when four or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 65e4, the reserved balls that become hits are stored in the reserved balls. As shown in FIG. 127, the distribution member 65c and the storage flow path 65e4 are arranged at positions that can be seen by the player. Therefore, by winning an over prize during the jackpot game, more prize balls are paid out than usual. In addition to the expectation for this, you can enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-prize game ball is guided to the storage flow path 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening having a height that allows one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has entered the opening is moved to the back side of the game board 13. A guide path is formed to guide the taxiing. Inside the specific winning opening 65a, a guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for causing the game ball to flow downstream is formed, and the guide hole and the over winning flow path 65e3 or a normal winning path described later are formed. It is formed so as to communicate with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

A winning flow path switching member 65b is arranged between the normal winning flow path 65e1 and the over winning flow path 65e3 so that the game ball can be distributed into the normal winning flow path 65e1 and the over winning flow path 65e3. Has been done. The winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward by an over-winning solenoid (not shown) so that the tip is oriented horizontally (see FIG. 128B) and is rotated downward so that the tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in a state (see FIG. 128 (a)). When the over-winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b rotates upward (see FIG. 128B), and when the over-winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b moves downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128 (a)).

The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow vertically downward in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128A), and is used to discharge the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. A discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is arranged in the discharge flow path 65e2. The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path through which the game balls flow down until 10 balls are won in each round, and the flowing game balls pass through the discharge flow path 65e2 and the probability change switch 65a5 is arranged. After being guided to, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The game ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same manner as the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is possible to store the game ball and use it for production.

The over winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow down to the left in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward and communicates with the over winning flow path 65e3 (see FIG. 128B). Is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won more than 10 balls in each round flow down. At the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3, an over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photosensor) for detecting the passage of the over-winning game ball is arranged. On the downstream side of the over-winning flow path 65e3, a distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game ball into the storage flow path 65e4 and the discharge flow path 65e2 is arranged.

The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than that of one game ball. A shaft portion formed so as to project to the back surface side is formed in the center of the distribution member 65c, and is configured to be rotatable left and right by a stepping motor. The distribution member 65c is configured as a storage area 65c1 with a recess in which one game ball can be inserted. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c so that a game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can enter the storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 is configured so that when the game ball enters, the entire game ball fits within the storage area 65c1 so that even if the distribution member 65c rotates, the rotation is not hindered. Has been done. The distribution member 65c always has a storage area 65c1 in the direction of 45 degrees to the upper right, which is a position (see FIG. 128 (a)) at which a game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can be received in the leader area 65c1. It is stopped with the opening facing, and two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over winning detection switch 65a2, the game ball is stored in the storage area 65c1 so that it rotates in either the left-right direction. It is configured. The direction of rotation is determined based on the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball stored in the reserved ball. Details will be described later, but if a reserved ball that will be a big hit is stored, a lottery will be executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball occurs, and if the lottery is won, it will be shaken. The split member 65c rotates to the left, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided by the storage flow path 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Then, the game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is allowed to flow down. If the lottery with a probability of 1/2 is not obtained, the distribution member 65c rotates to the right, and the game ball in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (distribution). Will be done.

When the hold ball that becomes a big hit is not stored in the hold ball in the hold (when the hold ball that becomes a big hit is stored when passing through the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing through the probability change switch 65a5)) , The lottery is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution member 65c is rotated and distributed to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned jackpot holding ball is stored. If a reserved ball that becomes a big hit when passing through the switch 65a5 is stored, the over winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and the distribution member 65c is on the right for more game balls. The game balls that rotate in the direction and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

As described above, the storage flow path 65e4 is formed with a storage area 65i capable of storing up to 6 over-winning balls at the terminal portion. The storage area 65i is configured to have a height at which the game balls can be stored in two stages, and is formed at a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging the game ball in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end portion. The storage switching member 65g is in a state in which the shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side is rotatably fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage region 65i and rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b). The state shown by the dotted line shown in)) and the state of being rotated downward with the tip facing vertically downward are configured to be rotatable. In this control example, at the start of the jackpot game, it is in a state of being rotated downward, and based on the ending start timing which is the end timing of the jackpot game, it is rotated upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and the storage area. The game ball in the 65i is configured to be discharged to the storage / discharge flow path 65e6. A storage / discharge switch 65a4 (photosensor or the like) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is arranged in an upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage / discharge flow path 65e6. The game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is configured so as not to be guided by the probability change switch 65a5.

Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a probability change switch 65a5, which are variable by the probability change solenoid 65k, are provided at the point where the discharge flow path 65e2 flows down. When the probabilistic solenoid 65k is on, the flowing game ball can pass through the probabilistic switch 65a5, and when the probabilistic solenoid 65k is off, the flowing game ball cannot (or is difficult) pass through the probabilistic switch 65a5. It is configured to be.

As described above, in the variable winning device 65 in this control example, the winning flow path switching member 65b is such that the game ball passes through the normal winning flow path 65e1 until the number of winning balls defined in each round is reached. Is controlled. Therefore, the flow path between the over-winning game ball and the over-winning game ball can be separated, and the over-winning game ball can be accurately detected.

In this control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in front of the effect unit (distribution member 65c, storage flow path 65e4, storage area 65i) so that it can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine 10. There is.

As described above, in this control example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, the distribution member 65c rotates, and an effect of whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the over prize has been won. The player can visually recognize that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirm the over-winning, and enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates in the left-right direction. can. The hit / fail determination result of the reserved balls stored in the hold can also be predicted by the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. In this control example, when a holding ball that becomes a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the game ball is configured to be guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability. Therefore, the distribution member 65c is used to guide the game ball to the storage area 65i. The determination result in the reserved ball can also be predicted by the frequency of distribution to. Therefore, the player can store the reserved ball that becomes a big hit in the reserved ball by allocating the game ball to the storage area 65i, and the big hit is continuously executed in a short period of time even after this big hit game. Can have expectations for. Further, in this control example, since the maximum number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set according to the judgment result stored in the hold, the hit / fail judgment result can be set early from the guided number. Can be predicted. Further, when 5 or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that the reserved balls that are big hits are stored in the hold, and the determination result is notified to the player at an early stage to promote the interest. Can be improved.

In this control example, it is configured to notify that the reserved balls that are big hits with 5 or more balls are stored, but the number or the like may be set as appropriate. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c may be appropriately set. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence rate of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). Further, the maximum number of balls in the reserved ball guided to the storage area 65i may be changed depending on the rate of occurrence of over-winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game, or during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with characters or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are accumulated in the storage area 65i, the holding sequence is confirmed !!". Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution member 65c may be configured to distribute in a seesaw shape. In addition, all the over-winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the judgment result in the reserved ball is notified by the number of stored over-winning balls, and it is used for promotion production during the jackpot game from the normal symbol to the probabilistic symbol. You may. In this case, it is conceivable that the number of over-winning balls during the jackpot game is set so that promotion chances are given.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second control example, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. The differences are in that they are, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution motor 65c2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is driven and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, the distribution motor 65c2 is started to be driven, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is driven alternately counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2 second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over winning flow path 65e3. A position rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise around a position where the game ball can be accepted (a position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage flow path 65e4) and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (a position where the game ball flows down to the storage flow path 65e4). The game ball in the storage area 65c1 is moved alternately with the position where the game ball flows down to the out flow path 65e5 (see FIG. 128).

The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp output device 113, and is lit and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The direction notification LED 295 is arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and five (295f to 295j) on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five (295a to 295e) on the lower decorative surface 523b2, for a total of ten. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the game state is a game state in which the player strikes right-handed, the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to turn clockwise (clockwise), suggesting that the player strikes right-handed. (Notification) When the game state is a left-handed gaming state, the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is controlled to turn counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting that the left-handed hit is performed. (Notified).

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The storage number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage number counter 203v is added by 1 when the distribution motor drive is set with the distribution destination as the storage flow path 65e4 in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133) (FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether the game balls will be distributed to the storage area in excess of the storage upper limit number. Referenced for. Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls that are distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the over-winning game balls. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 134) according to the reserved winning information (that is, according to the expected degree of subsequent big hit) (FIG. 134). See S5103, S5105, S5106). Then, when the value of the storage number counter 203v described above is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, it is allowed that the distribution destination is determined in the storage flow path 65e4. Although not shown, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a specific winning opening state 223p and a storage number counter 223r added to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to the opening state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific winning opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). , The closed state is set when a closing command based on the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning. , It is determined whether the command is based on the over prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example, will be described. FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 131 (a), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven in response to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. The display contents displayed on the three symbol display devices 81 are variable.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed in the part.

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved to the lower right and lower left. The image of the star is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the image of the star moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1. The image of the star moved to the lower right and the lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 are driven in response to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. Is displayed as a unit, and the effect of moving the star image in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is displayed. As a result, in addition to driving the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 up and down, it is possible to display an effect according to the drive, so that the player's interest can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. ..

The liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down described above. , The same image data is used, and the rotation angle and position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are combined. An image of a star is displayed in the part.

The image of the star displayed in the central portion is displayed by being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 described above are driven up and down. As a result, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

After that, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven to the left, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven to the right, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 becomes visible in the central portion. In response to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is duplicated and moved in four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left and displayed. The image of the star moved to the upper left and the lower left is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1, and is moved to the upper right and the lower right. The image of the star is displayed straddling the visible third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2.

The image of the star that is moved and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is counterclockwise (as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. It is displayed rotated 90 degrees (counterclockwise). In addition, the display positions are corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, whereas when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, the display area is vertically long. It changes from the display area to the horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position of each star symbol is corrected so that the amount of movement in the vertical direction is small and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction is large. As a result, the same effect can be displayed using the same image data even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and display position of the image of each star are corrected and moved to the upper left and the lower left. The image of the star to be displayed is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the image of the star moved to the upper right and the lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right, and the above-mentioned upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. In the case of the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the same image data is used, and the rotation angle and the display position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the amount of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

In this control example, the display position of the image data is corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) so as to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be compressed (reduced) so as to be horizontally long.

If either (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Or the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, the effect can be preferably displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a game method suggestion effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content of the game method suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decorative surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated to imitate an apple, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 is decorated with the left half thereof. The lower right half of the decorative surface 523b2 is decorated. Therefore, by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to adjacent positions, it is possible to perform an integrated effect.

Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged in a circumferential shape on the round fruit portion of the apple on the decorative surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is arranged at the uppermost position of the right half, and each direction notification LED 295 is arranged clockwise from there (in the order of direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c ... 295j). The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at the uppermost position of the left half.

These direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are lit and controlled by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command according to the current game state by the game method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

When a right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a right-handed gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is first turned on and off, and then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on and off. In this way, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in the clockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circumferential shape are turned on and off clockwise (clockwise), suggesting to the player that the player is currently in a game state of hitting right (right). Can be notified).

On the other hand, when a left-handed notification command indicating that the current game state is a left-handed gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off. , And so on, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off in the counterclockwise order. As a result, the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in a circumferential shape are turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting to the player that the player is currently in a game state of hitting left. Can be (notified).

FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic view showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132 (a). Also in this case, when the right-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on and off clockwise (clockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a. When the left-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is a gaming state in which right-handed (or left-handed) is performed by executing the same control process. Can be suggested (notified). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) is partially changed, and is the same in other points. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main control device 110.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

Then, in the processing of S1101, when it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this processing is completed. do.

Further, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON by the process of S1131, it becomes possible to store the game balls that have entered the storage area 65i. This storage area 65i is an area in which over-winning game balls flow down, and the content of the ending effect is configured to differ depending on the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game. .. The game ball stored in the storage area 65i is flowed down to the storage / discharge flow path 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to off at the end of the jackpot (before the start of the ending effect).

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1103). In the process of S1103, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to off (S1132), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), and the game is executed. This process ends.

By the process of S1132, the over-winning solenoid 65b1 is set to off, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 can flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1. Although the details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass through the detection switches 65a1 in the same round, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and the balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot normally flow down to the winning flow path 65e1, and flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the processing of S1133 that it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to on (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to off (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), this process is terminated.

By the processing of S1134, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1 and is over. It is in a state where it can flow down to the winning flow path 65e2. The game ball that has flowed down into the over winning flow path 65e2 flows down into the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

By the process of S1135, the open solenoid is set to off, so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been closed by the process of S1136. When the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of this closing command, it can be determined that the ball winning number command notified thereafter is the ball winning number command based on the over winning.

When it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1133, when it is determined that the operation timing of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the storage / discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that the storage / discharge timing is used. If this is the case (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to off (S1138), and this process ends.

In the process of S1137, if the timing is predetermined as the jackpot game (5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect in this control example), it is determined that the storage / discharge timing is reached. As a result, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i before the start of the ending effect can be counted by the storage / discharge switch 65a4, and the ending effect can be displayed according to the counting result.

The storage / discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, it may be counted by discharging it for each round, or it may be discharged at the timing when the ending command is received.

In the process of S1137, if it is determined that it is not the storage / discharge timing (S1137: No), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage / discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage / discharge switch 65a4 is pressed. If it is determined that has passed (S1139: Yes), a storage / discharge command is set (S1140), and this process is terminated.

Since the storage / discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1140, the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game can be counted in the voice lamp control device 113, and the number of game balls stored during the jackpot game can be counted according to the count result. The ending effect can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1108.

If it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed and the present process is ended as in the first control example.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process). (S1112), anomaly processing (S1113)) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so that the game ball that has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5. This is a process for setting.

In the distribution motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the distribution motor to distribute the game ball, so this process is performed as it is. finish. Not limited to this, it is natural that the distribution motor may be always driven.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reserved winning information includes winning information that is a big hit. (S5102).

In the processing of S5102, if it is determined that the reserved winning information includes winning information that will be a big hit (S5102: Yes), it is a case that it is confirmed that the winning information will be a big hit after that. Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the reserved winning information does not have the winning information that is a big hit (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not the sign flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the sign flag 203u is on (S5103), it is not confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit after that, but the probability of a big hit is high. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the sign flag 203u is on (S5103: No), when all the reserved winning information is out (that is, when the probability of becoming a big hit after that is low). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process proceeds to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the game ball that has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5 (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

Specifically, if the reserved prize information includes prize information that will be a big hit, a table for big hits is used, and if the counter value is "0 to 2", the distribution destination is stored. The road 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no winning information that will be a big hit in the reserved winning information, a table for removal is used, and if the counter value is "0 to 1", the distribution destination is set to the storage flow path 65e4. In the case of "2 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

In this way, when the winning information on hold has a big hit, the distribution destination is easily determined to the storage flow path 65e4, and when there is no big hit on the winning information on hold, the distribution destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. It is configured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

When the processing of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 in the processing of S5107 (S5108).

In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 (S5108: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the distribution destination is set to the storage flow path 65e4 and the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set ( S5111), the number of stored counters 203v is added by 1 (S5112), and this process is terminated.

By driving and controlling the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (direction) is changed from the state of being in the state of being in the state of communicating with the storage flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 with the distribution destination set to the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this process.

By driving and controlling the distribution motor 65c2 by the processing of S5112, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (direction) is changed from the state of being in the state of being in a state of communicating with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls that flow down the over winning flow path 65e2 and are stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out flow path 65e4. After that, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in which it communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

In this way, in the distribution motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 is set based on the reserved winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation of a big hit thereafter). It was configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 can be determined for the player. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, since the effect unit 65α is configured to be visible, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be visually recognized. As a result, the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be focused on, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the effect unit 65α is provided with a visible storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be determined. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the first control example described above is changed to execute the game method notification process (see FIG. 138) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103) is changed. The difference is that the jackpot-related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead, and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 135. In the main process 2, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the game method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Here, the details of the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, in this control example, the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a is closed during the jackpot game and the storage / discharging command indicating that the game ball has passed through the storage / discharging switch 65a4 are the main control devices 110. Will be sent from. The jackpot-related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example differs from the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103) in the first control example in that it is changed so as to perform processing when these commands are received. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot-related process 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2003).

When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2003 (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is added by 1 (S2004), and the display round is based on the value of the round number counter 223g. Set a number command (S2005). Then, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this process is terminated.

By the process of S2031, the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of the round from the main control device 110. As a result, it can be determined that the winning number command received when the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006).

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032). In the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), the received winning number command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is used. After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2033). When it is determined that the closing command has been received in the processing of S2033 (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, from the time when the closing command is received from the main control device 110 to the time when a new round number command is received (that is, after the specified number of winning openings 65a finishes winning the specified number (10 pieces), the next specific winning is given. Until the opening of the mouth 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on the over winning.

If the closed state is set based on the elapse of a predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over prize has been won. In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured to determine whether or not the closure command has been received at the elapsed timing of the predetermined period.

In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2033: No), then it is determined whether or not the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). If it is determined that the storage / discharge command has been received in the processing of S2035 (S2035: Yes), the storage / discharge counter 233r is added by 1 (S2036), and this processing is terminated.

Since the storage / discharge commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, the value of the storage / discharge counter 233r is stored when all the storage / discharge commands have been received. This is the number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. That is, it is possible to display the ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i. As a result, in the jackpot game, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be noticed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2011). In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is performed. finish.

In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 103). Execute and end this process.

Next, the details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ending effect processing 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201), and if it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is produced. (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

When it is determined that the school flag 223i is off in the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less) (S2231: No. ), The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process proceeds to S2209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, when there are more game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game) (S2231: Yes. ), The processing of S2203 to S2208 is executed in the same manner as the ending setting processing (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2209.

In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected by the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed in the same manner as the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this control example, when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect suggesting the degree of expectation that there is a winning information that will be a big hit in the hold is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage / discharge counter will be 2 or more (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i) in the jackpot game. Can be improved.

The value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is set to 2 or more, but the case is not limited to this, and a case of 3 or more may be used, and it is natural that such a limitation is not provided.

Further, only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may try to do it.

Further, it is natural that the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r.

Next, the details of the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. In the game method notification process (S1831), the current game state is a game state (so-called left-handed game state) in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side of the third symbol display device 81, and a third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) which of the game states (so-called right-handed game states) in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down on the right side of the device 81.

In the game method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is performed, so a right-handed hitting suggestion command for display is set (S5202). ).

The display right-handed suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub An image suggesting right-handedness is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5202 is completed, the right-handed suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and this process is terminated. By the right-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j. Is done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on clockwise (clockwise), which is right for the player. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the player is in a gaming state of striking. As a result, even during the production in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the game state of performing a right-handed strike. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in a right-handed gaming state is that the LED is turned on clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since there is no such thing, suggestion (notification) can be performed with the same control.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201 when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probabilistic gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the ball is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 even though the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state. Since it is the case where the game ball has passed through the provided through gate 67 (that is, when the right-handed game is being performed), the process of S5205 is performed in order to suggest (notify) that the game is in the left-handed game state. Move to.

In the process of S5205, a left-handed suggestion command for display is set (S5205). The display left-handed suggestion command set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display left-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub The text "Please return to left-handed!" Is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, so that an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

When the process of S5205 is completed, the left-handed suggestion LED command is set (S5206) to end this process. By the left-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295j to a. Is done. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LEDs are turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise) to the player. It is possible to suggest (notify) that the game is in a left-handed game state. As a result, even during the production in which the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inverted state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the gaming state of performing left-handed striking. ..

Further, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in a left-handed gaming state is that the LED is turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated. Since it does not change, suggestion (notification) can be performed with the same control.

As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio of the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot is distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 based on the reserved winning information (that is, the jackpot is subsequently achieved). It was configured differently (depending on expectations). As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 can be determined for the player. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the second control example, the effect unit 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing the over-winning game balls during the jackpot is arranged is configured to be visible. As a result, the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c, and the distribution operation by the distribution motor 65c can be noticed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second control example, the effect unit 65α is visibly provided with a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game can be easily grasped, and a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In the second control example, the game balls that have been over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area that can be seen by the player, and the jackpot is hit according to the number of stored game balls (value of the storage / discharge counter 223r). It is configured to change the production content of the ending effect of the game. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may try to do it.

In the second control example, the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (direction in which the game ball is launched) are arranged in a circumferential shape on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and are arranged in the circumferential shape. The lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j are configured to indicate the gaming state. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is highlighted, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Further, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the game state without changing the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

<About the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2, which are the back sides of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, are used. I explained about the game machine that performed the production.

On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display are displayed. A mirror effect is configured so that the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the production at the same time, so that the variation of the production can be increased. It can improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and the light is reflected and becomes a mirror (mirror) when viewed from the bright side. However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and it looks like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) to be inverted and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is ready to be displayed (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. As a result, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready is not visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

Here, an effect mode of the mirror effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid and moved to close positions, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to a close position, and the proximity thereof is changed. At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted, and the upper decorative surfaces (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

A left mirror 298a is arranged behind the left side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is arranged behind the right side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are tilted so as to be positioned rearward (rear side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the upper surface side. It has a character-shaped arrangement (see FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the center side of each mirror 298 from the front side via the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298.

The right mirror front LED 296a is arranged on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and the left mirror front LED 296b is arranged on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, the left mirror back LED 297a is arranged on the back side of the left mirror 298a, and the right mirror back LED 297b is arranged on the back side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are each composed of a magic mirror, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 or The decoration mode can be displayed. When the left mirror rear LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is transparent and the rear side is visible (not a mirror but a transmissive member) and does not form a mirror surface, so that the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. It is configured in. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

With this configuration, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state in which the player can see it and a state in which it cannot be seen by the player, and the player can be provided with a fresh effect. Can be done.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

In the third control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The contents are different in that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. Is. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is a scenario for inverting the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding them.

In the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide motor 431 is specified as the operation target, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, and the number of operation steps corresponds to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223 m. 100 is specified, and the positive direction is specified as the operating direction.

Corresponding to the value "2001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "8001" of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 100 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Corresponding to the value "10001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m, the reversing motor 531 is specified as the operation target, 50 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. ing.

Then, the information of "END" indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored corresponding to the value "12001" of the drive scenario counter 223 m.

In this way, in the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 slides and displaces from the separated position to the close position over 2 seconds, and in the close position, the reflection position (display surface facing the back side (523a1)) from the normal position. , 523a2) is inverted over 2 seconds to the position where it can be seen from the front side through the mirror 298), then maintained in the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position over 2 seconds. It reverses and slides from the near position to the separated position over 2 seconds.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mirror effect in progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the mirror effect is being executed, and if it is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates that there is no such thing. This mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145). Set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144) controls the lighting / extinguishing of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297, and inverts the display contents with respect to the display control device 114. Notification of the command to make it is performed. Although not shown, it is set to off when the variation display in which the mirror effect is executed is completed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the first control example described above is changed so that the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143), and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106). The difference is that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 143. In the main process 3, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling the lighting / extinguishing of the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 and inverting the display contents with respect to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for notifying.

In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is on. If it is determined in the process of S1851 that the flag 223s during the mirror effect is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect has not been executed, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the mirror effect in-progress flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). When the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 1 in the processing of S5302 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5303) in order to prevent the mirror 298 from functioning as a mirror. ), Set the mirror rear LED 297 to ON (S5304), and end this process.

In the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

In the process of S5305, when the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to a close position. It is the timing when the reversing operation is completed at the close position. In this case, in order to make the display surfaces (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side through the mirror 298 by the reverse operation, the process of S5306 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S5306, the display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to on (S5307), the mirror back LED 297 is set to off (S5308), and this process is terminated. As a result, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is symmetrically inverted (that is, the display content is normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes brighter, so that the mirror 298 becomes brighter. Will function as a mirror.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

When the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is determined to be 8000 in the processing of S5309 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the back side is inverted to the front side in the mirror effect. ..

In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5310), the mirror back LED 297 is set to on (S5311), and the display inversion correction end command is set (S5312) to end this process.

By the processing of S5310 to S5312, the display contents of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 are set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set to the state in which the mirror does not function as a mirror. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

In the processing of S5313, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, so the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5314) and the mirror is mirrored. The rear LED 297 is set to off (S5315), and this process ends.

By the processing of S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not performed, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 can be turned off, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. The variation display setting process 3 (S1813) executes the processes S2301 to S2307 as in the first control example. When the process of S2307 is completed, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

In the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: Yes), it is a case where a variation pattern including the mirror effect is set. Is set to on, and the process proceeds to S2308.

On the other hand, in the process of S2351, when it is determined that the drive scenario is a drive scenario that does not correspond to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

After S2308, the processes of S2308 to S2312 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display are displayed. A mirror effect is configured so that the display content on the surface 523a2 can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror (mirror) 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side thereof can be used for the production at the same time, so that the variation of the production can be increased. It can improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, light is reflected and becomes a mirror, but when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and becomes like a window. Then, the mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and the mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror (mirror). On the other hand, by turning on the LED 297 on the back side of the mirror, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright, and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). By controlling the lighting of the LED in this way, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

In addition, when functioning as a window, by providing a pattern or a pattern on the back side of the mirror 298 so as to be visible, it is possible to produce an effect integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Further, by arranging the effect LED on the back side and changing the lighting pattern of the LED, it is possible to change the pattern or pattern that becomes visible when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of the production can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) to be inverted and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is ready to be displayed (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. , The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. As a result, the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before the display is ready is not visible to the player, so that a suitable effect can be provided.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. As a result, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, and then the upper display surface is displayed. Since it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

<Modified example of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modified example of the mirror effect described with reference to FIG. 139 will be described. In this control example, in the case of executing a mirror effect for the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, a left rear mirror member 299a is formed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved so as to be projected (reflected) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted to a position facing parallel to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely flattened.

<About a modified example of the first control example>
Next, a modified example of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. In FIGS. 148 to 150, the order in which each symbol (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlaps with respect to the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example is different, and is special. After displaying that the symbol has won the jackpot with the third symbol, it is used in the technology (so-called probabilistic promotion production) to notify whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot using the effect display. be.

In this case, when the probabilistic promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and moved so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (upper display surface 523a1 and). The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so as to come into contact with the display surface), and the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 indicates that the "probability change promotion effect" is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the promotion effect symbol is enlarged and displayed by one. The symbol for promotion effect displayed in this case is a character symbol in which the part indicating the number is deleted, unlike the third symbol displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variable game). When the character symbol displayed in this state has the same mode (character) as the "probability variation symbol" (design with specific numbers, for example, "3" and "7") used in the normal game. , It becomes a production display indicating that the probability change jackpot was won by the "probability change promotion effect".

On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state has the same mode (character) as the symbol other than the "probability variation symbol" used in the normal game, the "probability variation promotion" is performed without notifying that the probability variation jackpot has been won. "Direction" continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually expanded by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is expanded to the state shown in FIG. 150 (b). When enlarged, a mode in which a number is shown is given to a part of the character symbols (for example, the character symbol displayed in the center) among the three character symbols displayed side by side in the vertical direction.

If the number given in this case is the number attached to the "probability variation symbol" used in normal games (for example, "3", "7"), the probability variation jackpot was won by the "probability variation promotion effect". It becomes an effect display indicating that. That is, as the character symbol used for this "probability variation promotion effect", the same character as the third symbol used in the normal game is used, and a plurality of numbers (at least, "probability variation symbol" is attached to the character symbol. It is configured to have an aspect indicating a number (a number attached other than the number and the “probability variation symbol”).

According to the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)) and the timing at which the character symbol is indicated by a number (FIG. 150 (b)). )) It is possible to notify that the probabilistic jackpot has been won at the two timings. Therefore, from the start to the end of the "probability change promotion production", the player pays close attention to the production while expecting to be promoted to the probability change jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

Further, in the above-mentioned "probability change promotion effect", each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is given a mode of indicating a number, and the number attached to each character symbol is a predetermined rule (numbers are added). If this is the case, it may become an odd number, or if the number satisfies a predetermined rule (for example, "341"), it may be notified that the probability variation jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to more effectively use the expansion of the display area for the production.

In addition, the timing of adding numbers to the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is shifted, and the mode of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect". You may do so.

<About the 4th control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game to the first control example described above, only the closing command indicating the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Was configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time from receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

First, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a jackpot middle flag 223t, and a timekeeping counter 223u are added, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Is shown. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to an open state when it is determined in the jackpot game timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) that it is the round start timing (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set. The closed state is set when a closing command based on the closing of is received (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set specific winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning. , It is determined whether the command is based on the over prize.

The jackpot medium flag 223t is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the jackpot game is being executed, and when it is off, the jackpot game is being executed. Indicates that there is no such thing. The jackpot flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, it is referred to in the jackpot timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. , Off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which some processes are changed is executed instead of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) for the first control example described above, and the ending. The difference is that the ending process 4 (S1110) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the details thereof. Explanation is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the start of the round is determined by measuring the elapsed time from receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round in the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and is the same in other points. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the start of the ending is determined by counting the elapsed time from receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of executed rounds in the voice lamp control device 113. There is. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for an ending command indicating the start of the ending in the jackpot game from the main control device 110, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, for the first control example described above, the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) in which some processes are changed is executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103), and the jackpot timekeeping process. (See FIG. 156) is different in that it is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154. In the main process 4, the processes S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S1811 is completed, the jackpot timekeeping process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. The details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. In the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received for the first control example, the jackpot middle flag 223t is set to on, and the specific prize is won during the jackpot game. Based on the fact that the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed is received, the elapsed time from receiving the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds command and the ending command are received. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set. Then (S2002), the jackpot medium flag is set to ON (S2071), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072).

In the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2072, when it is determined that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is used. After setting (S2010), this process ends.

In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received (S2073).

In the process of S2073, when it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the time counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), End this process.

By the process of S2075, the time counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. As a result, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2073, when it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process of timing to discriminate between the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

In the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not during the jackpot game and it is not necessary to perform timekeeping, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301 when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is added by 1 (S5302) to the added value of the timekeeping counter 223u. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing (S5303).

Specifically, if the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is 4000, it means that 4 seconds have passed since the end of the round, so it is determined that it is the round start timing.

When it is determined in the processing of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is added by 1 (S5304), the display round number command is set (S5305), and a specific prize is won. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the ending start timing (S5307).

Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the timekeeping counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the closing command in the final round. It is determined that this is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

If the ending effect is started after a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed in the final round, the timekeeping counter 223u may wait until the predetermined period is reached.

In the process of S5307, when it is determined that the ending start timing is reached (S5307), the same ending setting process (see FIG. 105) as in the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the jackpot middle flag 223t is set to off (S5310), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly used. It is configured to transmit from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time from receiving the closing command. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158, a modified example of the opening / closing display effect in the first control example will be described.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Will be done. The decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding up and down with each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The fish school effect (the effect that the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured so that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a variable display of the school of fish according to the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid left and right (slides outward in the left-right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Will be done. The decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking on the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2. It shows that the middle symbol, which is the reach display mode, is changing.

FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward from each other. The reach symbols are moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbols are moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The fish school effect (the effect that the school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. In this way, the display of the school of fish is configured so that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to display a variable display of the school of fish according to the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school of fish moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be used can be widened.

When the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 rotates in the state shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the rotation coordinates and the display coordinates of the display data of the same school of fish effect are corrected and set, so that they are displayed respectively. It is configured to be. As a result, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the amount of data can be suppressed.

The present invention may be applied to each of the above control examples or a pachinko machine of a type different from each control example. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned control example, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<About the concept of the invention, for example, a slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine including a one-side member, a other-side member arranged to face the one-side member, and a slide member whose one-side and other-side members are guided by the one-side member and the other-side member to be slid-displaced. The slide member is located between a one-sided guided member guided by the one-sided member, another guided member guided by the other-side member, and one-sided guided portion and the other-side guided portion. A rotating member that is rotatably supported by the pachinko machine, and the permissible state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the permissible state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. A game machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member whose one side and the other side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has the slide member of one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. We devised a configuration formed from a rotating member rotatably supported between them (not known at the time of filing the present application). According to such a configuration, the rotating member can be rotated as well as the slide displacement, so that the variation of the effect operation can be increased. Further, by rotating the rotating member, for example, not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side can be visually recognized by the player.

However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member due to the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. .. That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the permissible state of the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is different from the permissible state of the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When an inertial force associated with the start or stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and the slide member is the one-side member and the other-side member. It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is increased by the amount of the gap. A possible form, a form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or these are combined. For example, the case.

The gaming machine A1 is provided with a rotation driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-side guided member, which is more easily tolerated.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-sided guided member in a form in which the relative displacement is easily allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be applied to the slide member on the one-side member or the other-side member. When the pressing force (braking force) is used, the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member, which is opposite to the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-sided guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, so that the one-side member On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced by a locus farther from the other-side guided member. As a result, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means can be more easily used. Therefore, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the slide members are arranged so as to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid and displaced in the directions close to each other, one of the slide members. The side guided member is arranged to face the other side guided member of the other slide member, and the other side guided member of one slide member is arranged to face the other side guided member of the other slide member. Characterized game machine A4.

Here, when a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement and slide-displaced in a direction close to each other so as to face each other at the central position, there is no gap between the two members at the central position. When they come into contact with each other, the load on the driving means (motor) for sliding-displace the slide members becomes large, which causes damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism (gear, etc.).

On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow a margin at the position where both are stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, or control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between the two at the central position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player through the gap, which causes deterioration of the appearance (effect).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, since the pair of slide members are arranged to face each other in different directions, they are slid and displaced in the directions close to each other and are centered. When the slide members come into contact with each other at the position, one side guided member of one and the other slide member retracts to accept the other side guided member of the other (the other and one) slide member. (The pair of slide members can be tilted with respect to the direction of slide displacement based on the difference in the allowable states of relative displacement described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members come into contact with each other at the central position, damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the positions at which the two slide members are stopped can be set to closer positions. As a result, at the central position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between them, and the appearance (effect) can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one-side member and the other-side member are arranged, a sensor device arranged on the base member, and a member to be detected detected by the sensor device. The gaming machine A5, wherein the detected member is arranged on the other side guided member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member is less tolerable than the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the member to be detected is arranged, even if the posture of the slide member changes, the displacement of the member to be detected with respect to the base member (sensor device) can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member with respect to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged to face each other is used as an example>
A gaming machine including a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and an inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

Here, a gaming machine including a member formed so as to be displaceable is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

In this case, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is arranged on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing the present application), the displacement of the displacement member is started or displaced. There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base due to the inertial force accompanying the stop of. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the base member is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the base member with respect to the base due to the inertial force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. It is possible to prevent the base member from being rotated with respect to the base when the inertial force accompanying the above is applied to the base member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

The mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rotational displacement, swing displacement, slide displacement, and displacement in a combination thereof. The locus of slide displacement may be a straight line, a curved line, or a locus combining these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by the elastic deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by being guided by one side member, the other side member arranged to face the one side member, and one side and the other side by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. The slide member includes a one-sided guided member guided by the one-side member, another guided member guided by the other-side member, and one-sided guided portion thereof. A rotating member rotatably supported between the other-side guided portions is provided, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is such that the other-side cover with respect to the other-side member. Unlike the allowable state of relative displacement of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one side guided member and the other side guided member of the slide member, and the other one side guided member and the other of the slide member. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the side guided members are arranged in opposite postures.

Here, one side member, another side member arranged to face the one side member, and a slide member whose one side and the other side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application has the slide member of one side guided member guided by one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. If a rotating member rotatably supported between the members is provided, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to one side member is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. The configuration was devised (not known at the time of filing the application). According to such a configuration, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, and as a result, the slide member becomes the one-side member. And it is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member.

In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the above-mentioned one-side member and the other-side member are arranged on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing the application of the present application). According to such a configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member can be changed according to the rotation position of the base member, so that the variation of the effect operation can be increased accordingly. ..

However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one of the slides is slid when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member. The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement in the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement in the other slide member are in alternating directions (point-symmetrical directions that give rotational inertia to the base member). Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it was difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotating position with respect to the base.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the pair of slide members are the one side guided member and the other side guided member of one slide member, and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are arranged in opposite postures, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, one side The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member can be in the same direction (line-symmetrical direction), and the base member is the base. It is possible to suppress the rotation with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

As a configuration for forming the relative displacement of the one-side guided member or the other-side guided member with respect to the one-side member or the other-side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is increased by the amount of the gap. A possible form, a form in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body. Alternatively, a form in which these are combined is exemplified.

Further, as a form in which the allowable state is different, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form a unit relative displacement) is different, or these are combined. For example, the case.

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. In the case of sliding displacement in the direction, the rotation of the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is located substantially vertically above the other-side guided member. A game machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. , When the slide member is slid and displaced in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side guided member is located substantially vertically above the other side guided member. Since the rotation position is set, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (one side of the slide member). The displacement component (displacement component) that exerts a force (braking force) that presses against the member or the other side member can be set downward in the vertical direction (direction of gravity). As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is possible to prevent the slide member from floating, and it is possible to stabilize the rotation.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

In the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily allowed than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. In the case of sliding displacement in the direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is located substantially vertically below the other-side guided member. A game machine B4 characterized in that a rotation position is set.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more likely to be tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. , When the slide member is slid and displaced in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which one side guided member is located substantially vertically below the other side guided member. Since the rotation position of the slide member is set, when an inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, the displacement component (slide member) in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The displacement component (displacement component) that exerts a force (braking force) that presses against one side member or the other side member can be set upward in the vertical direction (direction opposite to the direction of gravity). As a result, when the slide member is slid and displaced, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the sliding portion due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

The forms in which the relative displacement is easily allowed include, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form the unit relative displacement is reduced, and when these are combined. Illustrated.

The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B3 includes a rotation driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member, and the rotation driving means is arranged on the one-side guided member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the rotation driving means is arranged on one side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is more easily allowed as compared with the other side guided member, so that the slide When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is the force (braking force) that presses the slide member against one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means is used to increase the pressing force. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the rotating driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member is provided, and the rotational driving means is arranged on the other side guided member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction can be set upward in the vertical direction (direction opposite to the gravity direction). Since the rotation driving means is arranged on the other side guided member whose relative displacement is less tolerable than that of the guide member, the direction is orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. It is possible to prevent the displacement component of the above from becoming too large. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be suppressed from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide is slid. Wear of the sliding part due to displacement can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member, which is opposite to the other-side guided member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the one-sided guided member opposite to the other-side guided member, so that the one-side member On the other hand, when the one-side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced by a locus farther from the other-side guided member. As a result, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one-side member or the other-side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational driving means can be more easily used. Therefore, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to prevent the slide member from floating, and the rotation can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member, which is opposite to the other side member.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is arranged on the outer surface side of the other side guided member which is opposite to the other side member, so that the one side member and the other side When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are respectively displaced relative to the member, the rotation driving means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be suppressed from being slid and displaced, and when the slide member is slid and displaced, the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed and the slide is slid. Wear of the sliding part due to displacement can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide member 4520 whose position of the rotating shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a game machine provided with a slide member formed so as to be slidable between the first position and the second position, the slide member is arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position. The slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine C1 characterized by this.

Here, a gaming machine including a slide member formed so as to be slidably displaceable between a first position and a second position is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

The applicant of the present application includes an opposing member arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the side opposite to the second position, and an effect means for producing an effect between the opposing member and the sliding member. A game machine was devised (not known at the time of filing the application). However, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the sliding member arranged at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the effect by the effect means cannot be sufficiently performed (for example, the movable member for the effect). Space cannot be secured, or the area for visually recognizing the members for production cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side and is positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. The visible area of the member (for example, the liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, which leads to an increase in the size of the device as a whole.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of slide displacement. The interval between can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the opposite member is large, the effect by the effect means can be sufficiently performed, while the slide member is moved to the rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the opposite member is small. By rotating the slide member, the amount of protrusion of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the entire device can be miniaturized.

As the effect means, for example, a displaceable member is displaced by using the space between the facing members and the sliding members, and the facing member is a space between the facing members and the sliding members. Examples include those that are displaced by using, those that allow the display and decoration on the back side to be visually recognized from between the facing members and the sliding members, those that irradiate light between the facing members and the sliding members, and those that combine these. NS.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect means includes an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the facing space between the facing member and the slide member.

Here, for example, in a configuration in which the facing member irradiates light toward the space facing the slide member, the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the slide member from the space facing the slide member and the facing member. It can be carried out.

In this case, in the above-described configuration, if the distance between the sliding member arranged at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be sufficiently visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side and is positioned on the trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member. The visible area of the member (for example, the liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the facing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member becomes large, which leads to an increase in the size of the device as a whole.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation axis located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement, so that the slide member is formed at the rotation position. Depending on the situation, the distance between the facing members and the facing members can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the distance between the slide member and the facing member becomes large, the light emitted from the irradiation means can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, while the slide member faces the facing member. By rotating the slide member to a rotation position where the interval becomes smaller, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position side can be reduced, and a visible area of other members can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the facing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the facing member can be reduced, and the entire device can be miniaturized.

The irradiation means is arranged in a mode in which the slide member is arranged on the opposing member so as to be able to irradiate the slide member, a mode in which the sliding member is arranged on the slide member so as to be able to irradiate the facing member, and between the slide member and the facing member. Examples thereof include a mode in which irradiation is possible and arranged on the back side between the facing surfaces, and a mode in which these are combined.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 or C2 includes a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member is arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for the rotation of the base member with respect to the base while maintaining the slide member in the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a pair of the slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members are arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. As a result, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be made effective.

In the gaming machines C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is a rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member causes the position of the center of gravity to be changed to the base. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is kept away from the center of rotation of the base member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the rotation of the slide member causes the rotation. Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is changed by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the base member is brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is the rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, the slide member By rotating, the position of the center of gravity is brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, so that the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening 5641 is formed as an example is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member includes an opening formed on a side surface thereof, and the object is a part thereof. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to pass through a state in which a slingshot is projected outward from the opening.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be flowed in from one end side, passed on the back side of the game area, and then discharged from the other end side to the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member displaceably arranged on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount of the passage member protruding.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed on the side surface thereof, and is formed so that the object can pass through with a part of the opening protruding outward from the opening. Therefore, as compared with the case where the entire object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be secured accordingly.

The cross-sectional shape of the passage member is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a circular cross-section, an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that a pair of the openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a pair of openings are arranged to face each other in the passage member, so that the facing distance between the side surfaces where the pair of openings are formed is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently secure the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, an inclined surface is formed on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening in the passage member, so that the object is one of the inclined surfaces. The amount of protrusion that allows the portion to protrude from the opening to the outside is expanded to suppress the protrusion of the passage member, and the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral edge of the opening is secured to improve the rigidity of the passage member. be able to.

In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is set to a dimension at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Since it is set to, when the object projects a part of the object from the opening to the outside, it is possible to suppress that the object is received only by the tip (inner peripheral side end) of the inclined surface. That is, since the ball can be received at the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, damage to the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed with a rectangular cross section from the four wall portions, and the opening is formed on at least one of the four wall portions. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed from the four wall portions in a rectangular cross section, and is formed on at least one of the four wall portions. Since the opening is formed, the cross-sectional coefficient of the passage member can be secured and the rigidity thereof can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed into a circular cross-sectional shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular cross-sectional shape is a line segment connecting two points on the curve. The gaming machine D6, characterized in that the opening is formed by cutting with a machine.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-sectional shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and is on a curve in the circular cross-section. Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, in the passage member, the passage path of the object is curved or bent, and the opening is the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object by the bending or bending of the passage path. The gaming machine D7, which is formed on the side surface of the passage member on the opposite side to the above.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the position where the opening is formed is opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the bending or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side surface of the opening, that is, on the side surface opposite to the side surface on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, it is possible to prevent the peripheral edge of the opening from being worn or damaged.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member includes at least a displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member follows a displacement locus of a part of an object protruding from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable to at least a range including it, it is possible to effectively utilize the region where the overhang of the passage member is reduced and expand the displacement region of the displacement member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

The displacement member may be formed so as to be partially displaceable from the opening of the passage member to the position where the displacement member is inserted into the inside of the passage member. In this case, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and it is possible to give power by bringing it closer to the player.

The gaming machine D8 includes a detecting means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least the region where the opening is formed in the passage member, and when the detecting means detects the object, the displacement member The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is restricted from being displaced to at least a range including the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in at least the region where the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member is at least a displacement locus (passage member). Since it is restricted to be displaced to at least a range including (displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening), it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

In the gaming machine D9, the detection means is provided upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and includes a first switch and a second switch for detecting the passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. The gaming machine D10 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D9, the detecting means are arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and detect the passage of an object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, the presence or absence of an object in at least the region where the opening of the passage member is formed can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

<Characteristic E group> (directed by over-winning game balls)
Based on the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, a variable member that can be changed to one state that regulates the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and a second state in which the regulation is lifted, and the establishment of specific conditions. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state and the privilege game execution means, the ball enters the ball entry means. A variable that causes the variable member to be changed from the second state to the first state based on the counting means for counting the number of the game balls and the count value by the counting means having reached a predetermined upper limit value. The effect executing means for executing the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means and the effect executed by the effect executing means are determined before the means and the variable means change the ball to the second state. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect determining means is configured to be capable of determining a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. ..

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a start-in ball, the winning state may be entered. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state is reached, a large opening provided on the board surface is set to the open state. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is in a winning state, which is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a specified number or more of winning balls are detected in the open state of 1 for the large opening. By doing so, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the players.

However, with such a conventional gaming machine, even if the over-winning effect is executed, the player is only made aware that he / she has won a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is fully appreciated. In some cases, it could not be improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball, one state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted to the entry means, and the second state in which the regulation is released can be changed. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of the variable member and the specific condition, and the privilege game execution means. When this is done, the variable member is subjected to the counting means for counting the number of game balls entered into the ball entering means and the variable member based on the fact that the count value by the counting means has reached a predetermined upper limit value. An effect of executing an effect based on a variable means for changing from the second state to the first state and a game ball entering the ball entering means before the variable means is changed to the second state. It has an execution means and an effect determining means for determining an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, and the effect determining means can determine a special effect mode when a special condition is satisfied. It is configured in.

This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition in the game machine E1, the acquisition means for acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the storage means for storing the information are stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. It has a discriminating means for discriminating information and a specific condition satisfying means for satisfying the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means by the discriminating means. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is set as at least one condition that the information to be determined as a specific determination result is stored.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination condition. It has a discriminating means for discriminating information and a specific condition satisfying means for satisfying the specific condition when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, and the special condition is the discriminating in the storage means. It is set as at least one condition that the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by the means is stored.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means by executing the effect of the special effect mode. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect of the special effect mode is executed, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability when the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the special condition has a predetermined probability when the storage means stores the information determined to be a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means. Therefore, even if the effect of the special effect mode is not executed in the privilege game, there is a possibility that information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the effect of the special effect mode is not executed, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the information that becomes a specific determination result is stored. It has the effect of maintaining motivation.

A gaming machine E4, wherein in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes an effect using a game ball after being counted by the counting means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect using the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means. , There is an effect that the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for executing the effect is provided separately from the game ball.

In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes a mode in which the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific region configured to be visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode guides the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Since it includes, it is possible to focus on a specific area and play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has an audio output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Production can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the game machines E1 to E6, the game machine E7 has a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, there is a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode. Because there is, it is possible to realize a visual effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A mode of the end effect executing means for executing the end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E7 and the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. The gaming machine E8, which comprises means for determining the end effect mode for determining.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the end effect execution means for executing the end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the end effect mode determination for determining the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. Since it has means and means, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the end of the privileged game.

<Characteristic F group> (The accessory is formed by reversing the sub liquid crystal)
An effect executing means that executes an effect based on the discrimination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area. As one of the above, the display mode is displayed as one of the first display means having the first specific notification unit for notifying the player of the specific notification mode and the effect executed by the effect executing means. A second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area. At least the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. A gaming machine F1 having one display means and a displacement means capable of displace the second display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like in the configuration, and can execute various effects by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of the conventional gaming machines employ a technique for ensuring the visibility of the display effect even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the execution of the display effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134891).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, it may not be possible to realize an appropriate effect operation using the display effect. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of production.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the first display area in which the display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. And the first display means having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution means. As one of the above-mentioned effects, a second display having a second display area on which the display mode is displayed and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area. The means, the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are provided to the player, respectively. The second display means that can be visually recognized includes at least the first display means and the displacement means that can displace the second display means.

Thereby, a plurality of effects having different modes can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

In the second state of the gaming machine F1, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. The featured gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is combined with the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is composed of a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit displays a part of the specific design. Is displayed, among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed by the first specific notification unit, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The gaming machine F3, characterized in that the specific symbol is formed by combining them.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific notification mode is composed of a specific symbol, a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit displays a part of the specific symbol. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols that are not displayed by the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific symbol is formed.

As a result, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed by using the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, so that there is an effect that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first display means and the second display means have a different third display means, and the effect executing means has the effect in the third display area of the third display means. As one of the above, a predetermined display mode is displayed. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are close to each other in parallel with the third display area, or at least a part thereof overlaps with each other. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first display means and the second display means have a different third display means, and the effect executing means is predetermined as one of the effects in the third display area of the third display means. The display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged in parallel or at least partially overlapped with each other in close proximity to the third display area. Therefore, there is an effect that a more flexible production can be realized.

When the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the effect executing means includes the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is easy to execute the specific notification mode when executing the effect of.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect executing means includes the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to carry out the specific notification mode.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific notification mode will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

An effect determining means for determining an effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the determination means for executing the determination and the determination result of the determination means in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5 based on the establishment of the determination condition. The gaming machine F6, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and an effect determining means for determining the effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

As a result, there is an effect that various production modes can be realized according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

<Feature G group> (Display by moving the design of the main liquid crystal while moving the sub liquid crystal)
At least the second display means at a position where the display area of the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the second display means overlap with the display area of the first display means. A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means and the second display means for displaying and controlling the first movable means, the first display means, and the second display means, respectively. In the state, when the first movable means is moved on the display area of the first display means, the first display area after being moved with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by the movement. It is characterized by having a display mode setting means for setting a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means in the display control means. Game machine G1 to play.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display in a plurality of configurations. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying a main effect related to the game and a sub display device for displaying an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom in display production.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying a symbol, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means. A first movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping the above, a display control means for displaying and controlling the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means. Display of the first display means exposed by moving when a predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display area of the first display means by the first movable means. Display mode setting in which the display control means is set to a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display means after being moved with respect to the region. Means and.

This has the effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means.

In the gaming machine G1, the display areas of the third display means and the third display means, which are different from the first display means and the second display means, overlap with the first display area, and the second display means and one end of each overlap with the first display area. The display control means has a second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means at the same position, and the second display means and the third display means are each said. When it is moved to the same position, it is characterized in that it displays a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display area with one end as a boundary based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Game machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the display area of the third display means overlap with the first display area, and one end of each is the same as the second display means. The display control means includes, at least, a second movable means capable of moving the third display means to a position to be a position, and the display control means is such that the second display means and the third display means are each described above. When the symbols are moved to the same position, a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across each other's display areas with one end as a boundary is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

As a result, the symbol 1 can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, so that there is an effect that a display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means has the second display means and the third display means in a state where the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that when at least one of the display means is movable in a direction away from the display means, the specific movable display mode is set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means in the second display means and the third display means. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in a direction in which the second display means and the third display means are separated from each other, the specific movable display mode is set. There is an effect that appropriate display contents can be displayed for each of the three display means.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the symbol 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the second display means, the first display means and the above. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is set to be displayed by the third display means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the above. Since the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means are set to be displayed respectively, the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means can be used more freely. There is an effect that a high degree of display content can be realized.

<Feature H group> (Right-handed notification on rotating display device)
An entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means. Specific to the discrimination execution means that executes the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means. When the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, the firing intensity of the game ball is based on the operation of the player in the game machine having the variable ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. The first flow path in which the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can flow down by the launching means capable of variably firing and the launching means is different from the first firing intensity. After the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity flows down and the identification information based on the specific discriminant result is displayed with the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged, the second flow The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a suggesting means for causing the display means to display a suggesting mode suggesting that the gaming ball is launched on the road.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member, and the like in the configuration, and can execute various effects by the display effect and the movable effect. Some of such conventional gaming machines can display a suggestion display image suggesting the direction in which the gaming ball is launched to the display device. This conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during the display of the suggestion display image (for example,). JP-A-2015-134891).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device is variable. Therefore, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a risk that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be appropriately notified.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. Based on the storage means for storing the information acquired in the above, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Those having a display means for displaying identification information and a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player and a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity by the launching means can flow down. A possible first flow path, a second flow path in which a gaming ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity flows down and the variable entry means is arranged, and a specific said After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path.

As a result, the player who has confirmed the suggested mode can launch the game ball with the second firing intensity, so that even a beginner of the game can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means. You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine whose gaming method is easier to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine H1, the suggestion mode includes a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of a rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. The gaming machine H2 having at least a part of a ring shape and including a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, and the suggested mode is a ring. It has at least a part of the shape and includes a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

As a result, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggestion mode having at least a part of the ring shape.

In the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is characterized in that the gaming ball rotates in the direction of flying to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating the gaming ball in the direction of flying to the second flow path, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that the gaming ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or H3, character information indicating that the game ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode. There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the aspect can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that the symbol is displayed to the player. There is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched can be intuitively understood from the impression of.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the back surface side of the display means is inverted so as to be located on the player side, and the back surface side of the display means is a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path. The gaming machine H6, characterized in that the above is arranged.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it has a reversing means for reversing so that the back surface side of the display means is located on the player side, and a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged on the back surface side of the display means. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can accurately understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to be lit in order toward the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is the second stream. Since the lighting is controlled in order toward the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is launched.

<Feature I group> (The sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the effect execution means and the display means are specific to cause the display means to display the effect mode accompanying the identification information based on the determination result. When the identification information is displayed based on the determination result, the privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and the display means in the possessing gaming machine are the main display means and the first display means thereof. The sub-display means is composed of at least a first position parallel to the display area and a sub-display means movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. When the movable means that can be moved to the second position and the sub-display means are moved to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and the sub-display means is displayed. When the sub-display means is moved to the second position and a specific condition is satisfied, the sub-display means is identified by switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by having a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which information is displayed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display in a plurality of configurations. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device for displaying a main effect related to the game and a sub display device for displaying an auxiliary effect, the degree of freedom of the display effect is increased and the player's interest is improved. I am trying to. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, the sub display device can be moved to the front side of the main display device, and the main display device and the sub display device can perform a complex display effect (for example). , JP-A-2015-029606).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom in display production.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification on the display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the display means displays an effect mode associated with the identification information based on the discrimination result. It has an effect executing means to be executed, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific determination result, and the display. The means is at least a main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and at least a sub-display means movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. A movable means that is configured and capable of moving the sub-display means to the first position and the second position, and a main display when the sub-display means is moved to the first position. The identification information is displayed on the means, the sub-display means is set by switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub-display means, the sub-display means is moved to the second position, and specific conditions are set. If it is established, the sub-display means has a switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed.

As a result, the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub-display means, so that there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

In the gaming machine I1, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that, at one position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to face each other with the main display means in between.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-display means is composed of at least a first display means arranged on one end side of the main display means and a second display means arranged on the other end side of the main display means, and the first display means. In terms of position, the first display means and the second display means are positioned so as to face each other with the main display means in between.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed for the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other on one end side, so that the display area of the main display means is hard to see. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other on one end side to display the main display means. Since the area is hard to see, it is possible to realize a compact display using only the sub display means at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the gaming machine I2 or I3 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means, respectively.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first display means and the second display means each have a rotating means for rotating around the main display means, so that the sub There is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the display means.

In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means so that the first display means and the second display means move in the vertical direction of the main display means. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is variable to a vertical position where it is located and a left-right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means in the vertical direction of the main display means. It is variable to a vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located, and a left-right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the sub display means.

When the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position in the gaming machine I5 and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means The first fusion display mode in which the first display means is fused and displayed, and the sub when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position and then moved to the left and right positions. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode that is fused and displayed by the display means and the main display means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position. The first fusion display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed, and the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode in which the sub display means and the main display means are fused and displayed when the sub display means is later moved to the left and right positions, the fusion display mode setting means is provided. There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether the position is present or left and right.

<Characteristic J group> (Display mode of the inverted sub liquid crystal is displayed by a mirror)
When a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and an effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means are displayed, and an effect mode based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means and the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the display means is composed of at least a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the first display means. The two display means are rotated to the front position where the display area faces the front side and the second position where the display area faces the back side, respectively, and the first display means is rotated to the back position. When the first projection means and the second display means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side are rotated to the back position, they are displayed on the second display means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a second projection means for projecting the effect mode toward the front side.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined hobby effect is selected, the projection device is made visible, and the player's face or the like is projected onto the projection device to realize an impactful hobby effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-329159).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the projection device is merely set to be visible to the player, the target projected on the projection device is limited. Therefore, it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player by using the projection device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means are specified. When the effect mode based on the determination result is displayed, the display means includes a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the display means is a first display means and a second display means. A rotating means that can rotate the first display means and the second display means to a front position in which the display area faces the front side and a second position in which the display area faces the back side, respectively. The first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position, and the second display means for the back position. It has a second projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the front side when rotated to the front side.

As a result, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can visually recognize the effect modes displayed on the respective display means. That is, it is possible to realize a novel effect operation in which the first display means and the second display means can be rotated while the effect mode is visible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have a mirror surface portion capable of reflecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. The gaming machine J2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since it has a mirror surface portion that can be used, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can clearly see the effect mode displayed on each of them through the mirror surface portion. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are rotated to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine, respectively, as the back position. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has a V-shape on the front side of the gaming machine so that the first display means and the second display means are respectively rearward positions. Since it is rotated to a position, the appearance can be significantly different from the front position by being in the back position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are the first when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back positions, respectively. The gaming machine J4 having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means include the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the back position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

In the gaming machine J1, the effect mode is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the first display means is diffracted by the first projection means. The effect mode is arranged at a position facing the second display region of the second display means rotated to the first diffraction means and the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the second display means is diffracted to the second projection means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by having a second diffraction means for causing the rotation.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first diffraction means which is arranged at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means. A second diffracting means that is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means. And have.

Thereby, the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be freely determined within a range that can be diffracted by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be increased.

The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are half mirrors in the gaming machine J5.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are composed of a half mirror, the display area of the first display means and the second It is possible to change whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

In the gaming machine J5 or J6, when at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position, the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are rotated to the back position, respectively. The gaming machine J7 is characterized by having a display means or a movable means that can be moved to a position facing the second display means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first displaying means and the second displaying means is said to be the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Since it has the first display means or the movable means that can be moved to a position facing the second display means when it is rotated to the back position, the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Has the effect of being able to diffract more accurately.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning using the closure command)
The main control means that executes the control of the game, the secondary control means that executes the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state in which the game ball can enter, and the entry of the game ball are regulated. The main control means has a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a regulated state, and the main control means executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and an effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. An entry signal is output based on the entry of the game ball into the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the establishment signal output means for outputting the establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable entry means. The slave control means determines the effect information, and has a ball entry signal output means for the player and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. After receiving the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode based on the effect information determined by the means, the effect execution means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and the establishment signal, a predetermined value is provided. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until the condition is satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed based on a start-in ball, the winning state may be entered. In such a gaming machine, when a hit state is reached, a large opening provided on the board surface is set to the open state. By winning the game ball into the large opening, the prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is in a winning state, which is advantageous to the player. The large opening is set to a closed state in which it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set to the open state. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect (over-winning effect) is executed when a specified number or more of winning balls are detected in the open state of 1 for the large opening. By doing so, some players are trying to improve their interests (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-112239).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won a prize in the large opening opening in order to determine whether or not to execute the over-winning effect. In general, the number of balls entered until the mouth was closed was different. Therefore, it is necessary to reset the conditions for whether or not to execute the over-winning effect according to the model, and it may not be possible to transfer the program adopted for one model to another game machine as it is. rice field. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening that the gaming ball can enter. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state and a regulated state in which the entry of a game ball is restricted, and the main control means is a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination means thereof. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means and the discriminating result by the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the variable ball entering means is described. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that changes from a regulated state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, an establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable ball entry means. An entry signal output means for outputting a ball entry signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means. The subordinate control means is determined by the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode and the effect mode determining means based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. An effect executing means for executing the said effect mode, and a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period from receiving the establishment signal until the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Have.

As a result, the slave control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is simply received from the main control means, so that the slave control means directly determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine. Therefore, since it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the slave control means, there is an effect that the workload of the developer can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined predetermined period elapses. ..

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entering means or when a predetermined predetermined period elapses. Therefore, due to the execution of the specific effect, after a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the variable ball-entry means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player is further variable-entry. It is possible to make the means recognize that the game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be pleased.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the slave control means receives the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined predetermined period as the predetermined condition, the specific effect The gaming machine K3 is provided with an evasive means for avoiding the execution of the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined predetermined period as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal is received is provided, the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number is exceeded for the player due to the execution of the specific effect. Can notify that the ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific effect can be more pleased.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination condition is satisfied with the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means and the information acquired by the acquisition means. A prior signal indicating prior information based on the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means and the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means before the storage means to be stored and the discrimination condition are satisfied. The sub-control means has a pre-information storage means for storing the pre-information indicated by the pre-signal, and the specific effect mode is , The gaming machine K4, which indicates the content of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means stores at least the acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition and the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is satisfied. The storage means, the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discriminating condition is satisfied, and the pre-signal indicating the pre-discrimination result based on the pre-discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means are used. The subordinate control means has a pre-information storage means for storing the pre-information indicated by the pre-signal, and the specific effect mode includes a pre-signal output means for outputting to the control means. It shows the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

As a result, in order to confirm the contents of the prior information, the game ball is positively given to the player during the execution of the privilege game in an attempt to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine K1 characterized in that, in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in any of the above-described embodiments or the gaming machines in each control example, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine in terms of improving the interest of the player.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is an entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry means of the game ball entering the ball. And the storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means. A display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result, and a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means at the first firing intensity. The first flow path through which the ball can flow down and the game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity flow down, and the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged. And a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path after the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. ..
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 rotates the display means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side. The suggestion mode includes a direction suggestion mode that has at least a part of a ring shape and indicates the direction of the second flow path.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating in the direction in which the game ball flies to the second flow path.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. Based on the storage means in which the information acquired in the means is stored, the discrimination execution means for executing the discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means. It has a display means for displaying the identification information, and a variable ball entry means capable of entering the game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A launching means capable of varying the firing intensity of a gaming ball based on a player's operation and launching a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity by the launching means flows down. A specific flow path in which a game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from that of the first firing intensity flows down and a second flow path in which the variable entry means is arranged. After the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, there is a suggestion means for causing the display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the display means has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of the rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side, and the suggested mode is a ring. It has at least a part of the shape and includes a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.
As a result, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggestion mode having at least a part of the ring shape.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the direction suggestion mode rotates in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path. Is displayed dynamically.
This has the effect of notifying the player of the direction in which the game ball is to be launched in an easy-to-understand manner.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 First prize opening (ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of slave control means)
203j Winning number counter (counting means)
S305 discrimination means
S307, S309 Production information determination means
S1004 privilege game execution means
S2074, S5306 Information setting means
S3304 Opening effect execution means

Claims (3)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
A storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the information.
A discrimination execution means that executes discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a discrimination execution means.
A display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
In a gaming machine having a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means.
A launching means that can change the firing intensity of the game ball based on the player's operation and launch it.
The first flow path through which the game ball launched at the first launch intensity can flow down by the launching means, and the game ball launched at the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity flow down. Then, with the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is arranged,
After the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the display means has a suggestion means for displaying a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball is launched into the second flow path. A featured gaming machine. It has a rotating means capable of rotating the display means based on the establishment of a rotation condition in a state where the display area of the display means faces the front side.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the suggestion mode includes at least a part of a ring shape and includes a direction suggestion mode indicating the direction of the second flow path. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the direction suggestion mode is such that the gaming ball rotates in the direction of flying to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

Images